Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 226

No.

2D201-063E*E

SERVICE MANUAL
FOR
WHOLE-BODY X-RAY CT SCANNER

TSX-101A
MULTISLICE CT SCAN SYSTEM
GANTRY/COUCH CONTROL SECTION VOLUME
(2D201-063E*E)

 TOSHIBA MEDICAL SYSTEMS CORPORATION 2002-2003


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
IMPORTANT!

1. No part of this manual may be copied or reprinted, in whole or in part,


without written permission.

2. The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice
and without our legal obligation.

3. The contents of this manual are correct to the best of our knowledge.
Please inform us of any ambiguous or erroneous descriptions, missing
information, etc.

No. 2D201-063E*E
2
REVISION RECORD

REV. DATE REASON PAGE SER. DOC.


(MM/YY) /AUTHOR CHANGED No. PRODUCT.

INI. 11/'02 Mr. Yamashita ------- TM-WI7

*A 01/'03 Mr. Kasuya

*B 10/'03 Due to change of company name Mr. Soejima

*C 10/'03 Mr. Soejima

*D 11/'03 Support of a DD motor Mr. Harada

*E 12/'03 Review of descriptions in the manual Mr. Soejima

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*E
3
THIS PAGE IS LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

No. 2D201-063E*E
4
Safety Precautions

1. Meaning of Signal Words

In this manual, the signal words DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION are used
regarding important safety instructions. The signal words and their meanings are defined as
follows. Please understand their meanings clearly before reading this manual.

Signal word Meaning

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided,


will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,


could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,


may result in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may


result in property damage.

No. 2D201-063E*E
5
2. Safety Precautions

Please observe the following precautions to ensure the safety of the service engineer as well as
operators when servicing this equipment.

DANGER: 1. This system is not explosion-proof. Therefore, do not use


flammable or explosive gases near the system. If flammable or
explosive gases enter the system, a fire or explosion may occur.

2. When servicing is to be performed with the gantry cover open, be


sure to turn OFF the power of the system at the distribution board
and wait for five minutes or more to prevent workers from
receiving electric shocks or being injured due to unexpected
system operations.

3. If it is necessary to perform servicing with the system turned ON,


supply power only to the required parts. At the same time, take
safety measures such as turning OFF the power of the cover
switch and the NFB120 (power to the rotation servo motor).

4. If it is necessary to rotate the gantry with the cover open, take


special precautions to ensure that persons are not accidentally
caught in the rotation section.

5. When disconnecting the high-voltage cable, observe the following


to fully discharge its residual charge in order to ensure safety
during servicing work.

• Turn power OFF and wait five minutes or more.


• When the high-voltage cable has been disconnected,
simultaneously ground two of the three pins at the top of the
bushing in all three combinations. Repeat all combinations
twice or more.
• Do not touch the top of the bushing.
• Place a cap, vinyl cover, etc. over the tip of the bushing to
protect it.

6. Hazardous voltage in the LCSR (slip ring section) and brush


section will cause electric shock. Do not remove the rear dome
cover. If it is necessary to remove the rear dome cover, turn OFF
the breaker before mounting/removing the rear dome cover.
Do not turn ON the power of the gantry when the rear dome cover
is removed.

7. Gantry rotation may continue even if an eXam Plan is interrupted.


Particularly when servicing work (phantom replacement etc.) is
performed with the gantry cover open, observe the following.

• Be sure to terminate the eXam Plan and confirm that rotation of


the rotation section has stopped.
• Turn OFF NFB120 (power to the rotation servo motor).

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*E
6
DANGER: 8. Do not remove the covers of the console monitor and X-ray high-
voltage generator in the gantry because there are high-voltage
sections inside them. If the covers are removed, accidental
contact may occur, causing electric shock and possibly death.

WARNING: 1. Before starting service procedures, turn OFF the breaker and all
the system power switches on the distribution board. (To ensure
safety.)

2. Make sure that ground cables are securely connected for


electrical shock prevention and stable system operation.

3. The system employs a laser beam device. Do not look directly


into the laser beam, as doing so could injure your eyes.

4. Use the cover switch, NFB120, rotation lock pins, etc. to prevent
inadvertent gantry rotation during servicing work in order to
ensure safety of the workers.

5. After opening the gantry front cover, support the cover with two
supporting poles to the rear of the cover. Use the supporting
poles correctly.
If the supporting poles are used incorrectly or the cover is lifted
inadvertently, the supporting poles may fall causing the cover to
close suddenly due to its weight, resulting in injury.

6. Since the rotation section of gantry may rotate suddenly,


carefully install the CT scanner. (For example, when console is
changed to "eXam Plan" during operation or a short-circuit is
caused by any part being touched with the probe of the
measuring instrument.)

7. If a part of the rotation section of gantry is to be removed, be


sure to engage the rotation lock pin of the rotation drive section.
Otherwise, the rotation section may rotate suddenly due to the
weight imbalance caused by removal of the part, and a worker
may get caught in the rotation section and be seriously injured
as a result. Hold the rotation section firmly when pulling out the
rotation lock pin.

8. After completing the work, be sure to confirm that all mounting


screws of the cover are tightened firmly.
If the gantry is tilted with the screws not tightened firmly, the
cover may open, fall, or interfere with objects around it, leading
to injury or damage.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*E
7
CAUTION: 1. Do not modify or repair the system without permission.
Failure to do so may result in system malfunction or incorrect
system operation.

2. When handling the gantry covers such as removing, remounting,


replacing, lifting, or lowering them, wear protective glasses and
gloves. The gantry covers are made of FRP, and your eyes, hands,
or fingers may be injured by the glass fibers in the FRP.

3. When repair or replacement work must be temporarily interrupted,


take appropriate measures such as closing the covers etc. to ensure
safety.

4. Connecting or using any device in combination may cause the


system to operate unstably or dangerously.

5. Make sure that the power supply, frequency, voltage and voltage
fluctuation values conform to the specifications of the system.

6. Make sure that all cable connectors are connected correctly and
that the cables and oil hoses are arranged properly.

7. Make sure that no cooling oil leaks.

8. Before starting X-ray exposure, check whether the necessary


protective measures have been taken, so that the door is closed, no
persons or X-ray sensitive materials such as film are in the scanner
room, and X-rays do not leak from the scanner room.

9. When replacing or checking parts that can be damaged by static


electricity, such as PWBs, hard disks, etc., be sure to wear an
antistatic wristband.

10. When tilting the gantry, do not place your foot on this cover.
Your foot may be caught, resulting in personal injury.

11. Before checking the safety circuit of the KGTSM PWB, be sure to
disconnect CN451 of the KGTSM PWB.
(Disconnect CN451 of the KGTSM PWB to turn OFF the power of tilt
motor, rotation servo system, couch, etc.)
If the safety circuit is defective or if operation is incorrect, the tilt,
rotation motor, or couch may move, resulting in personal injury.
(Refer to subsection 9.8 "Check of Safety Circuit on the KGTSM
PWB".)

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*E
8
CAUTION: 1. Keep the site room at the proper temperature and humidity and well ventilated.
Keep the system protected from unnecessary vibration or shock.

2. When the gantry is to be tilted with the front cover open, be extremely careful
not to allow the front cover to come into contact with the ceiling or the patient
couch. Otherwise, the system may be damaged.

3. When rotating the rotation section manually, be sure to release the brake before
rotating the rotation section. Rotating the rotation section without releasing the
brake may result in system malfunction.

4. Never pull the cable when disconnecting the connector. Doing so may damage
the cable.

5. Do not perform ON/OFF operation of SW120 during gantry rotation. Doing so


may damage the DD motor controller. To turn OFF the power, use NFB120.
(Refer to subsection 7.2 "Gantry Rotation Interlock".)

6. When SW32 on the maintenance panel is set to 8, do not perform scanning


more than 10 times in succession.
After shutdown, wait for at least 30 seconds before restarting the system.
Otherwise, the controller for the DD motor may be damaged.
(Refer to subsection 5.2 "Procedures to Use the Maintenance Panel".)

7. When checking the terminal log of the KGTSM PWB, do not turn the gantry
power ON/OFF or reset the KGTSM PWB. These actions will result in the
memory being cleared.
(Refer to subsection 6.1.5 "Terminal log".)

8. When checking or performing fine adjustment of the gantry rotation speed,


observe the following precautions.

• Do not set the panel switch (SW1) to OFF (upward) before all operations
from the maintenance panel are completed.

• After using the maintenance panel, be sure to set the panel switch OFF and
reset the KGTSM.
(Refer to subsection 7.4 "Gantry Rotation Speed Check and Fine Adjustment
Procedure".)

9. When setting the parameters for the couch slide servo amplifier (only for the
CBTB-014A), do not use parameters other than those specified in the list
(9.7.6 (1)). Doing so may cause a system malfunction.
(Refer to subsection 9.7.1 "Flow of corrective measures against a servo error
during sliding".)

10. When the mode is being changed using the [MODE] key of the couch slide
servo amplifier (only for the CBTB-014A), do not change the auto-gain tuning
mode. Doing so may cause a system malfunction.
(Refer to subsection 9.7.1 "Flow of corrective measures against a servo error
during sliding".)

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*E
9
Precautions for Service Work

Countermeasures against static electricity

If service work is performed at sites at which countermeasures against static electricity


are not taken, be sure to take countermeasures against static electricity to prevent the
PWBs from being damaged and to ensure quality.

[Examples]

• When performing service work such as replacement of PWBs, be sure to wear a wrist
strap.
• If PWBs must be put down somewhere, they must be placed on an antistatic sheet.

Work sheet

NOTE: Periodic inspection

Be sure to perform periodic inspection to confirm that appropriate countermeasures


against static electricity are being taken (the antistatic mechanism functions normally).
(Perform continuity check.)

<Additional information>

Manufacturer : Sumitomo 3M, Inc.

Model name : 8012J

Product name : Conductive plastic product portable field service kit

Items contained : Work sheet--------------------- 1


Wrist strap --------------------- 1
4.5-m ground cable---------- 1

No. 2D201-063E*E
10
How to Use This Manual

1. Notation Conventions

(1) NOTE

This manual uses the following conventions for word usage in addition to the signal
words (refer to "Safety Precautions") that indicate remarks related to safety
precautions. Carefully read the contents of this manual before performing service
work.

NOTE: Indicates information of interest to users of equipment as to exceptional conditions or


operating procedures.

(2) Indication of references

In this manual, sections and subsections relating to the descriptions are indicated for
reference as follows.

Î Refer to page 10, "1. Notation In this example, the information related to
Conventions", of this manual. the description with this indication is given
on page 10, "1. Notation Conventions", of
this manual.

(3) How to identify the model label

In this manual, two different descriptions are given for the same item on some
pages. One is for systems with serial numbers "S/N Axxxxx" and the other is for
systems with serial numbers "S/N Bxxxxx" as shown below. (Note that serial
numbers "S/N Bxxxxx" used for systems manufactured in January 2004 onwards.)

TOSHIBA
CT SCANNER GANTRY
MODEL CGGT-018A Check here on the label to determine
whether the serial number is A or B.
SERIAL No. A *****

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
11
2. Organization of the Service Manuals

The following 7 volumes are provided as the service manuals for the TSX-101A multislice
CT scan system (8-slice, 16-slice).

Table U-1 Service manual organization

TSX-101A Gantry mechanism section volume 2D201-061E*B


(8-slice, 16-slice)
service manuals Patient couch mechanism section volume 2D201-062E*C
Gantry/couch control section volume 2D201-063E*C
X-ray system volume 2D201-064E*C
Data acquisition section volume 2D201-065E*B
Data transfer section volume 2D201-059E*C
Console volume 2D201-060E*E

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
12
Table of Contents

Safety Precautions ......................................................................................................... 5


Precautions for Service Work .............................................................................. 10
How to Use This Manual .......................................................................................... 11

1. Scope...........................................................................................................19

2. General Outline..............................................................................19

3. Control Section Outline, Location,


and Configuration ......................................................................19
3.1 Outline.............................................................................................................19

3.2 Location .........................................................................................................19


3.3 Targets of Control ..................................................................................21
3.4 Composition and Explanation of Each Unit........................22
3.4.1 KGTSM PWB (Kind Gantry Table Sequencer Multi PWB) ...........23

3.4.2 KGTSP PWB (Kind Gantry Table Sequencer Power PWB) .........23

3.4.3 DD motor controller .....................................................................................23

3.4.4 GCIFA PWB (Gantry Console Interface Advanced


Multi PWB) & GCIFA-D PWB ....................................................................24

3.4.5 OPCONTA PWB (Optics Controller Advanced Multi PWB) .........24

3.4.6 Auxiliary operating panels ........................................................................24

3.4.7 SI PWB ...............................................................................................................24

3.5 Control Flow ...............................................................................................26

3.6 Interlocks ......................................................................................................28

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
13
3.6.1 Interlock in which X-ray generation is
interrupted or not performed ...................................................................28

3.7 List of Fuses Used for the Gantry ..............................................34


3.7.1 When the serial number is "S/N Axxxxx" ...........................................34

3.7.2 When the serial number is "S/N Bxxxxx" ...........................................37

3.8 Gantry Power-Supply Sequence .................................................40

4. Outline of the PWBs ...............................................................42


4.1 Settings of KGTSM Switches .........................................................42
4.1.1 When the patient couch is the CBTB-016A or CBTB-016B .........42

4.1.2 When the patient couch is the CBTB-014A .......................................43

4.2 KGTSM, Connectors, and LEDs...................................................44


4.3 VRs and Test Pins (TP) of the KGTSM PWB ......................50
4.4 Switch Setting of the OPCONTA PWB ....................................51

4.5 Connectors, LEDs, Test Pins (TP),


and DIP Switches of the OPCONTA PWB .............................51

4.6 Switch Setting of GCIFA ....................................................................51


4.7 GCIFA & GCIFA-D Connectors, LEDs,
Check Terminals (TP), and DIP Switches .............................51
4.8 Setting Short Pins and Adjusting
Variable Resistors on the KGTSP ..............................................52

5. Use of the KGTSM Maintenance Panel .........54


5.1 Important Notices ...................................................................................54

5.2 Procedures to Use the Maintenance Panel .........................54


5.3 Procedures for Use of KGTSM Maintenance Mode.......58
5.3.1 Outline ...............................................................................................................58

5.3.2 Use of maintenance mode ........................................................................59

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
14
5.3.3 Limitations .......................................................................................................59

6. Obtaining KGTSM Status Information ...........60


6.1 KGTSM Messages ..................................................................................60
6.1.1 Outline ...............................................................................................................60

6.1.2 Message output timing ...............................................................................60

6.1.3 Typical error messages..............................................................................61

6.1.4 DD motor error messages .........................................................................65

6.1.5 Terminal log ....................................................................................................71

6.2 Detailed KGTSM Status Codes


(Including Error Codes and Interlock Information) .......72
6.2.1 Details ................................................................................................................72

6.2.2 Explanation of errors ..................................................................................74

6.3 KGTSM Timer Checks (Including Timer Errors) ............102


6.3.1 Outline .............................................................................................................102

6.3.2 Timer error .....................................................................................................102

7. Gantry Rotation ...........................................................................103


7.1 Stop Position ...........................................................................................103
7.1.1 Aquilion stop position ..............................................................................103

7.2 Gantry Rotation Interlock


(When the Gantry Cover Is Opened) ......................................104
7.3 Rotation Speed of the Gantry Servo Motor .......................107
7.3.1 Check of the rotation speed of the gantry .......................................107

7.4 Gantry Rotation Speed Check


and Fine Adjustment Procedure ...............................................108
7.4.1 Outline .............................................................................................................108

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
15
7.5 DD Motor Error Messages
(Servo Amplifier Error Display) ..................................................112
7.5.1 When the serial number is "S/N Axxxxx" .........................................112

7.5.2 When the serial number is "S/N Bxxxxx" .........................................115

7.6 Outline of Operation of the Gantry Rotation


System and Troubleshooting ......................................................118
7.6.1 When the serial number is "S/N Axxxxx" .........................................118

7.6.2 When the serial number is "S/N Bxxxxx" .........................................129

7.7 Procedures for Replacing the MR Sensor


and the MR Sensor PWB .................................................................141
7.7.1 When the serial number is "S/N Axxxxx" .........................................141

7.7.2 When the serial number is "S/N Bxxxxx" .........................................144

7.8 Procedures for Adjusting the MR Sensor


and the MR Sensor PWB .................................................................145
7.8.1 When the serial number is "S/N Axxxxx" .........................................145

7.8.2 When the serial number is "S/N Bxxxxx" .........................................149

7.9 Procedures for Replacing the Rotation


Direction Photo Sensor Unit ........................................................152

8. Adjustment Checks ...............................................................154


8.1 Movement Range Setting Method for
Couch Autoslide ....................................................................................154
8.2 Setting the Zero-Clear Time for Couch Sliding ..............155

8.3 Procedure for Setting the Couch Horizontal


Movement Absolute Value Control Data .............................157

8.4 Couch-Top Sliding Fine Adjustment


Function Setting Procedure..........................................................160
8.5 Footswitch Mode Selection Procedure
(only for the patient couch CBTB-016A
or CBTB-016B) ........................................................................................161

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
16
8.6 Procedure for Setting the Couch Vertical
Movement Stop Position in Auto-Set Mode
(only for the patient couch CBTB-016A
or CBTB-016B) ........................................................................................162

8.7 Adjustment of Couch Height Displays .................................163

8.8 Adjustment of Projector Angle Display................................164

8.9 Checking the Couch Top Speed ................................................165

9. Miscellaneous................................................................................167
9.1 Checks and Adjustments After Parts
Replacement (KGTSM) .....................................................................167
9.2 Explanation of the System Setting Switches ...................167
9.2.1 DIP switch DSW4 on the KGTSM PWB ..............................................167

9.2.2 KGTSM PWB DIP switch DSW11 setting ..........................................168

9.3 Gantry X-ray Tube Position Information .............................169

9.4 Optical System Operation ..............................................................172


9.4.1 Wedge operation .........................................................................................172

9.4.2 Slit operation ................................................................................................172

9.5 Couch Slide Servo Amplifier


(for the CBTB-016A/016B) ..............................................................175
9.5.1 Outline of the couch horizontal movement section control .....175

9.5.2 Action to be taken when a slide servo error occurs ....................177

9.5.3 Maintenance tool operating procedure .............................................178

9.5.4 Alarm code list .............................................................................................192

9.5.5 Parameter list ...............................................................................................193

9.6 Patient Couch Control Troubleshooting


(for the CBTB-016A/016B) ..............................................................195
9.6.1 Vertical movement system .....................................................................195

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
17
9.6.2 Couch horizontal movement ..................................................................197

9.7 Patient Couch Sliding Servo Amplifier


(for the CBTB-014A) ............................................................................202
9.7.1 Flow of corrective measures against a servo error
during sliding ...............................................................................................202

9.7.2 Sliding servo driver operating procedure ........................................203

9.7.3 How to view an error of the sliding servo driver


(monitor mode) ............................................................................................205

9.7.4 When you want to view the set parameter values


of the sliding servo driver or to change the values
(parameter setting mode) ........................................................................207

9.7.5 Writing to the EEPROM (EEPROM write mode) .............................208

9.7.6 List of parameter setting values and error codes.........................209

9.8 Check of Safety Circuit on the KGTSM PWB ...................211


9.8.1 Purpose ...........................................................................................................211

9.8.2 Procedures for checking the safety circuit .....................................211

9.8.3 Checks of safety system and safety timer .......................................211

9.8.4 Check of slide runout detection circuit .............................................219

9.9 Magnet Conductor Covers .............................................................220

9.10 Additional Data .......................................................................................221


9.10.1 List of additional data items...................................................................221

9.10.2 Details of additional data items ............................................................222

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
18
1. Scope
This chapter describes the principles and repair procedures of the gantry and patient
couch control units of TSX-101A.

2. General Outline
The gantry and couch control is composed of several PWBs (KGTSM PWB, OPCONTA
PWB, etc.) and related units.

The core of the control section, the KGTSM PWB, provides status information of
detailed errors, interlocks, etc. This information can be seen on the PC (monitor).

This information can be used in combination with checks using LEDs etc. to identify
trouble areas, and perform countermeasures.

3. Control Section Outline, Location,


and Configuration
3.1 Outline
The control section is located inside the gantry and the patient couch.
The control section is designed to control operation of each of the drive sections of the
gantry and patient couch as well as data acquisition according to operation requests
from the console, the gantry operating panel, and the maintenance panel in the KGTSM
PWB.

3.2 Location
Figure 3.2-1 is a block diagram of the system.

No. 2D201-063E*E
19
Gantry
REF detector
SRU(72KW) Tube
SSMD
BMD XC SRU

DAS DAS
PSU
Laser projector Gantry rotation
section electrical
Slit components
OPCONTA
Wedge

Slit plate
Gantry rotation or
RMUDAT(LPBA,RPDM, PPBM) Magnetic gear
DD Motor
LCSR(POWER)
MR sensor UNIT
SMUDAT(LPBM,SPDA, PRTM)

DD MOTOR
Gantry
AMP
GCIFA-D GCIFA stationary section
electrical
GPR
component
Mat SW
GPL
Console Foot SW KGTSM
Tape SW

CT fluoroscopy Encoder
KGTSP Power sequence
Gantry tilting
section
Microphone External and median-line
projectors
speaker

Door SW Couch Couch


ECG slice count horizontal vertical SI CTport
synchronization
X-ON lamp movement movement
Patient
Respiratory couch
waveform

Figure 3.2-1 Block diagram of the system

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D 20
3.3 Targets of Control
This subsection outlines the items (functions) controlled by the control section. The
drive section (motion control) and data acquisition section are subject to control.

Table 3.3-1 Control target, function, outline

(1) Functions of the gantry stationary section

No. Function name Outline


1 Gantry rotation 0.4 s, 0.5 s, 0.6 s, 0.75 s, 1 s, 1.5 s, 2 s (1 s × 2),
3 s (1.5 s × 2)/rotation (continuous rotation)
Slow rotation (60 s/rotation) stops at any angle.
2 Gantry tilting +30° to -30°, remote operation
3 Data acquisition Control signals [VIEWTRIG, BGN, X-ray ON/OFF]
Data [Gantry position, rotation speed, tilt angle, acquisition view
count, couch position, couch speed]
4 Operating panel Operation instruction, position information display
5 Maintenance panel Operation instruction (local mode)
6 Optical data transfer Detection of four types of errors
error detection (Acquisition data, control data in both directions, DAS clock,
switching)
7 Communication with Control command, response, status
the console Serial RS422
8 Patient guide Status display
9 External projector ON/OFF, 2-minute automatic OFF, projector tilting
10 Foot SW Couch up/down movement or couch auto set/auto home
movement
11 Microphone Voice message

(2) Functions of the gantry rotating section

No. Function name Outline


1 Slit Scan slice thickness : 0.5/1/2/3/4 mm
Number of rows used : 2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16
Focus size : Large/small
2 DAS mode Main: 7 types + 1 type, Ref: 7 types, BMD: 7 types
3 Detector photodiode 0.5/1/2/3/4 mm
4 Projector ON/OFF, automatically extinguished after 2 minutes
5 Wedge Large, DR, small

No. 2D201-063E*E
21
(3) Patient-couch control functions

No. Function name Outline


1 Vertical movements Up movement, DOWN movement, auto-stop, remote operation
2 Horizontal movements IN movement, OUT movement, auto-sliding, free movement,
remote operation, display clear

(4) Option control functions

No. Function name Outline


1 CT fluoroscopy Operation from the local control console
2 Clinical application CTport, ECG synchronization, respiratory waveform
system

3.4 Composition and Explanation of Each Unit


The gantry/couch control section is mainly composed of eight different types of PWBs,
consisting of actuators, detection elements, power elements, relay elements, as well as
cables, etc. The detailed composition of these sections is shown in figure 3.4-1.

(1) KGTSM PWB Î Refer to figure 3.4-1.


(2) KGTSP PWB

(3) DD MOTOR controller

(4) GCIFA PWB

(5) GCIFA-D PWB

(6) OPCONTA PWB

(7) Operating panels (left and right)

(8) SI PWB

The above units are described hereafter.

No. 2D201-063E*E
22
3.4.1 KGTSM PWB (Kind Gantry Table Sequencer Multi PWB)

The KGTSM PWB plays a central role in the gantry and couch control units.
This PWB is equipped with the service panel.

<Functions>

(1) The KGTSM PWB receives operation requests from the SS/ADI2, the auxiliary
operating panels and the service panel, and checks the contents of the operation
requests and the status of the gantry and couch. It then controls the gantry
stationary unit and the couch and requests the OPCONTA PWB to operate the
rotating unit of the gantry.

(2) The PWB receives and processes position information coming from the actuators
and the status information of the inside rotor coming from the OPCONTA. It then
sends gantry/couch information to the SS/ADI2 and position information to the
auxiliary operating panels.

3.4.2 KGTSP PWB (Kind Gantry Table Sequencer Power PWB)

<Functions>

(1) This unit converts control signals (TTL level) output from the KGTSM PWB to
power signals for each actuator and outputs the power signals to the actuators.

(2) This PWB controls ON/OFF operations of the X-ray ON lamp located at the rear of
the gantry, the slice counter, and the lamp indicating that the scanning room is in
use located at the entrance of the scanning room, which are based on control
signals from the GCIFA PWB.

(3) This unit amplifies the signals from the front microphone and the center
microphone and sends them to the console.

3.4.3 DD motor controller

<Functions>

(1) This unit receives speed signals from the KGTSM PWB and outputs power
proportional to the received speed signals to the rotation DD motor (Direct Drive
Motor) in order to rotate the gantry. At this time, the unit also receives encoder
signals from the DD motor to enable control of the gantry rotation speed. (The
rotation speed is controlled so that it always follows the speed signals sent from the
KGTSM PWB.)

(2) This unit informs the KGTSM PWB of the status of the controller.

No. 2D201-063E*E
23
3.4.4 GCIFA PWB (Gantry Console Interface Advanced Multi PWB) &
GCIFA-D PWB

This PWB serves as an interface between the gantry and the console, has data
transmission functions.

<Functions>

(1) The PWB transfers the acquisition data (pure raw data) to the console.

(2) The PWB controls the transmission of all the control signals between the gantry
and the console. The signals to the rotation section are sent to the data
transmission section and the control signals to the stationary sections such as
KGTSM are sent to the corresponding PWBs.

(3) The PWB controls and adds extra data from KGTSM.

3.4.5 OPCONTA PWB (Optics Controller Advanced Multi PWB)

This PWB is used to control gantry optics and the positioning projectors in the gantry
rotating section. It also serves as an interface for data transmission.

<Functions>

(1) This PWB receives operation requests (serial data) of the X-ray beam control units
from the KGTSM PWB through the optical transmission system and it controls
these units according to the contents of the requests.

(2) Information of the slit and other control components in the rotating unit is sent as
serial data to the KGTSM PWB.

(3) This PWB receives the acquisition data (pure raw data) from the data acquisition
section (DAS) and transfers the data through the optical transmission system to the
GCIFA.

Î Refer to service manual 2D201-059E


(data transfer volume) for details of
the GCIFA PWB, GCIFA-D PWB, and
OPCONTA PWB.

3.4.6 Auxiliary operating panels


These panels are located at the right and left of the front gantry cover and are used to
operate the gantry and the couch.

3.4.7 SI PWB
This PWB is located under the rear base cover of the couch.

<Function>

This PWB converts couch sensor information to drive signals and outputs the signals to
the KGTSM PWB.

No. 2D201-063E*E
24
Slit, wedge
DAS GAIN setting Pulse motor Reference
sensor
OPCONTA PWB Control signal (POWER)
Reference sensor signal Internal projector
X-ray ON/OFF
Rotation section
XC (Semiconductor sensor) Slit plate
Operation request, or
VIEW trigger, BEGIN Gantry Magnetic gear DD
X-ray ON/OFF rotating section
Optical data sensor MOTOR
GAIN setting

Gantry Rotation pulse MR sensor UNIT


stationary section switching signal
Control signal (TTI)
GCIFA Gantry rotation position, servo information DD
MOTOR
PWB Control signal AMP Control signal (POWER)

Response, Reference position information


Position sensor
rotation section
Gantry tilting
Foot switch KGTSM PWB
Tilt angle information
Operation request Encoder AC motor
Console
(SERIAL) Patient couch Patient guide External projector
information
Control X-ray exposure display lamp
SS/ADI2 Response,
SW Operating request
signal (POWER)
KGTSM information Slice counter
PWB information (BUS) KGTSP PWB
Control signal (POWER)
Maintenance panel
Panel display Horizontal sensor
(in the KGTSM PWB)
Patient information
SW information couch Position sensor Patient couch
Horizontal position horizontal movement
information Encoder AC servo motor
GPL GPR SI PWB
Patient couch
(Operating panel) (Operating panel) Vertical sensor vertical movement
information
Position sensor UP: AC motor
Height information
Volume DOWN: solenoid valve

Figure 3.4-1 Detailed composition of the control section

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D 25
3.5 Control Flow
Control of the gantry and the couch is started when the KGTSM PWB receives
operation requests from the console, the operating panel, or the maintenance panel.

The control flows of the drive units Î Refer to figure 3.5-1.

The control flows of data acquisition Î Refer to figure 3.5-2.

The KGTSM PWB has a safety detection function. When this PWB detects an error, it
stops operation immediately or disconnects the 200 V power line.

GPL (left operating GPR (right Maintenance panel


Console
panel) operating panel) KGTSM
SW information
Foot SW
CT fluoroscopy (option) (Patient couch UP/DOWN or couch
auto set/auto home movement)
Operation request Operation request

Response
KGTSM PWB [Judgement, processing]

Rotation section internal operation request


Control signal
Response
Data transfer section
Operation (via GCIFA, MUDAT)
request
Response
KGTSM power unit
Slide servo DD-motor unit OPCONTA PWB
KGTSP PWB

Sensor

Sensor
Sensor Sensor
horizontal movement

vertical movement

External projector

Internal projector
Gantry rotation
Patient couch

Patient couch

Gantry tilting

DAS HFG
Wedge

Slit

Figure 3.5-1 Drive section operation control flow

No. 2D201-063E*E
26
SS/ADI2
PWB

Response Acquisition request

KGTSM
PWB
(1) VIEWTRIG [acquisition pulse]
(2) BGN ON/OFF [acquisition start/end] X-RAY ON/OFF

(1) Gantry position data (12-bit parallel)


(2) Gantry speed data (16-bit parallel)
(3) Patient couch position data (16-bit parallel)
(4) Acquisition projection data (16-bit parallel, 2-word)
(5) Tilt angle information GCIFA
(6) Couch speed (16-bit parallel) PWB
[Bypass]
GCIFA
PWB Added to image data
(Data transfer as extra data. MUDAT
section) [Bypass]
Extra data
(1) Gantry position
(Word #1) OPCONTA
(2) Gantry speed PWB
(Word #2) [Bypass]
(3) Patient couch position
(Word #3)
(4) Acquisition projection
(Word #6, 7)
(5) Tilt information
(Word #8)
(6) Couch speed
(Word #12)
XC PWB

Figure 3.5-2 Data acquisition control flow

No. 2D201-063E*E
27
3.6 Interlocks
The gantry/patient couch control section stops and disables the following operations
according to the gantry tilt angle, couch top height, couch top horizontal position, and
pressure sensing switches:

(1) Gantry tilt operation

(2) Couch vertical operation

(3) Couch top horizontal operation (slide)

(4) X-ray exposure

Interlock positions Î Refer to figures 3.6-1, 3.6-2, 3.6-3.

Operation interlocks Î Refer to tables 3.6-1, 3.6-2.

3.6.1 Interlock in which X-ray generation is interrupted or not performed

(1) If horizontal couch top movement is stopped by an interlock after the START button
( ) is pressed on the keyboard

(a) If X-rays are being generated, X-ray exposure is stopped immediately (during
scanoscopy or helical scan).

(b) If X-rays generation has not yet started, X-rays will not be generated (while
moving to the next slice after scanoscopy, helical scan, or routine scan).

No. 2D201-063E*E
28
Gantry tilt operation
(UP)
Couch horizontal movement
(+TILT) (-TILT)
(IN) (OUT)
Couch vertical
movement

(DOWN)
Mat SW
UP LIMIT
156
Height display: 175
50 88 68 15

IN-1 Height display: 0 OUT-2 OUT LIMIT


Mechanical 2034 Mechanical
stopper stopper

IN LIMIT OUT-1

997
916
857
DOWN LIMIT

822
REAR TAPE SWITCH FRONT TAPE SWITCH

817
AUTO STOP
HEIGHT-0.5
HEIGHT-0

HEIGHT-1
HEIGHT-2

458
353
Mechanical stopper (+31.75 to +32.25 )
TILT-µSW (-30.75 to -31.25 ) TILT+µSW (+30.75 to +31.25 )
TILT -30 TILT +30 Unit: mm
: Tape switches
TILT+POSITION
: Vertical movement system sensors
NOTE: During tilting in the (-) direction, the weight of the gantry acts as a counterbalance. Therefore no
mechanical stopper is provided. (If the self-lock mechanism of the motor does not function, the : Horizontal movement system sensors
gantry will only be tilted in the (+) tilt direction.) : Tilt operation system sensors

Figure 3.6-1 Interlock positions (CBTB-016A)

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*A 29
Gantry tilt operation
(UP)
Couch horizontal movement
(+TILT) (-TILT)
(IN) (OUT)
Couch vertical
movement

(DOWN)
Mat SW
UP LIMIT
156
Height display: 175
50 88 68 15

IN-1 Height display: 0 OUT-2 OUT LIMIT


Mechanical 1734 Mechanical
stopper stopper

IN LIMIT OUT-1

997
916
857
DOWN LIMIT

822
REAR TAPE SWITCH FRONT TAPE SWITCH

AUTO STOP

817
HEIGHT-0.5
HEIGHT-0

HEIGHT-1
HEIGHT-2

458
353
Mechanical stopper (+31.75 to +32.25 )
TILT-µSW (-30.75 to -31.25 ) TILT+µSW (+30.75 to +31.25 )
TILT -30 TILT +30 Unit: mm
: Tape switches
TILT+POSITION
: Vertical movement system sensors
NOTE: During tilting in the (-) direction, the weight of the gantry acts as a counterbalance. Therefore no
mechanical stopper is provided. (If the self-lock mechanism of the motor does not function, the : Horizontal movement system sensors
gantry will only be tilted in the (+) tilt direction.) : Tilt operation system sensors

Figure 3.6-2 Interlock positions (CBTB-016B)

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*A 30
Gantry tilt operation
(UP)
Couch horizontal movement
(+TILT) (-TILT)
(IN) (OUT)
Couch vertical
movement

(DOWN)
Mat SW
UP LIMIT
305
Height display: 175
50 237 68 11

IN-1 Height display: 0 OUT-2 OUT LIMIT


Mechanical 1463 Mechanical
stopper stopper

IN LIMIT OUT-1

997
906
857
DOWN LIMIT

822
REAR TAPE SWITCH FRONT TAPE SWITCH

AUTO STOP

817
HEIGHT-0.5
HEIGHT-0

HEIGHT-1
HEIGHT-2

448
343
Mechanical stopper (+31.75 to +32.25 )
TILT-µSW (-30.75 to -31.25 ) TILT+µSW (+30.75 to +31.25 )
TILT -30 TILT +30 Unit: mm
: Tape switches
TILT+POSITION
: Vertical movement system sensors
NOTE: During tilting in the (-) direction, the weight of the gantry acts as a counterbalance. Therefore no
mechanical stopper is provided. (If the self-lock mechanism of the motor does not function, the : Horizontal movement system sensors
gantry will only be tilted in the (+) tilt direction.) : Tilt operation system sensors

Figure 3.6-3 Interlock positions (CBTB-014A)

No. 2D201-063E*E
31
Table 3.6-1 Operation interlocks (CBTB-016A, -016B)

{: Movement possible ×: Movement impossible ∆: Movement restricted


Interlock + tilting - tilting IN movement OUT movement UP movement DOWN movement Free movement
1 Front tape switch × { × { { × {
2 Rear tape switch { × × × { × {
3 Mat switch × × × × × { {
4 IN•LIMIT { { × { { { {
5 IN-1 { { { { { { {
6 OUT-2 { { { ∆ *1 { { {
7 OUT-1 { { { ∆ *1 { { {
8 OUT•LIMIT { { { × { { {
9 UP•LIMIT { { { { × { {
10 HEIGHT-0 Possible up to +24° Possible up to -25° { { { ∆ *2 {
11 HEIGHT-0.5 Possible up to +14.5° Possible up to -13° { { { ∆ *3 {
12 HEIGHT-1 Possible up to +14.5° Possible up to -13° { { { ∆ *4 {
13 HEIGHT-2 Possible up to +0.5° Possible up to -13° × { { ∆ *4 ∆ *6
14 AUTO•STOP Possible up to +0.5° Possible up to -13° × { { ∆ *5 {
15 DOWN•LIMIT Possible up to +0.5° Possible up to -13° × { { × {
16 TILT [+0.5 to -13.0] { { { { { { {
17 TILT [-13.5 to -25.0] { { { { { Possible up to HEI-0.5 {
18 TILT [-25.5 to -30.0] { { { { { Possible up to HEI-0 {
19 TILT [+1.0 to +14.5] { { { { { Possible up to HEI-1 {
20 TILT [+15 to +24] { { { { { Possible up to HEI-0.5 {
21 TILT [+24.5 to +30] { { { { { Possible up to HEI-0 {
22 TILT + POSITION { { { { { Possible up to HEI-1 {
23 TILT +30° × { { { { Possible up to HEI-0 {
24 TILT -30° { × { { { Possible up to HEI-0 {
25 TILT ±µ SW Power units of the gantry stationary section and the patient couch: 200 V OFF (disabling gantry rotation, gantry tilting, couch horizontal
movement, and couch vertical movement)

*1: OUT movement from the console is impossible.


*2: DOWN movement is possible only when the tilt angle is within -25° to +24°.
*3: DOWN movement is possible only when the tilt angle is within -13° to +14.5°.
*4: DOWN movement is possible only when the tilt angle is within -13° to +0.5° and the couch top is at the OUT-1 position.
*5: DOWN movement is paused. The movement can be resumed by pressing the DOWN button.
*6: Free movement is disabled when the interlock is triggered from the UP direction. (*TILT+POSITION = +0.5° to +30°)

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*A 32
Table 3.6-2 Operation interlocks (CBTB-014A)

{: Movement possible ×: Movement impossible ∆: Movement restricted


Interlock + tilting - tilting IN movement OUT movement UP movement DOWN movement Free movement
1 Front tape SW × { × { { × {
2 Rear dome mat SW × × × × × { {
3 Rear tape SW { × × × { × {
4 IN⋅LIMIT { { × { { { {
5 IN-1 { { { { { { {
6 OUT-2 { { { ∆ *1 { { {
7 OUT-1 { { { ∆ *1 { { {
8 OUT⋅LIMIT { { { × { { {
9 UP⋅LIMIT { { { { × { {
10 HEIGHT-0 Possible up to +24° Possible up to -27° { { { ∆ *2 {
11 HEIGHT-0.5 Possible up to +16° Possible up to -15° { { { ∆ *3 {
12 HEIGHT-1 Possible up to +16° Possible up to -15° { { { ∆ *4 {
13 HEIGHT-2 Possible up to +0.5° Possible up to -15° × { { ∆ *4 ∆ *6
14 AUTO⋅STOP Possible up to +0.5° Possible up to -15° × { { ∆ *5 {
15 DOWN⋅LIMIT Possible up to +0.5° Possible up to -15° × { { × {
16 TILT [+0.5 to -15.0] { { { { { { {
17 TILT [-15.5 to -27.0] { { { { { Possible up to HEI-0.5 {
18 TILT [-27.5 to -30.0] { { { { { Possible up to HEI-0 {
19 TILT [+16.5 to +24.0] { { { { { Possible up to HEI-0.5 {
20 TILT [+24.5 to +30.0] { { { { { Possible up to HEI-0 {
21 TILT + POSITION { { { { { Possible up to HEI-1 {
22 TILT + 30 × { { { { Possible up to HEI-0 {
23 TILT - 30 { × { { { Possible up to HEI-0 {
24 TILT ±µ SW Power units of the gantry stationary section and the gantry: 200 V OFF (disabling gantry rotation, gantry tilting, couch horizontal movement, and
couch vertical movement)

*1: OUT movement from the console is impossible.


*2: DOWN movement is possible only when the tilt angle is within the range from -27° to +24°.
*3: DOWN movement is possible only when the tilt angle is within the range from -15° to +16°.
*4: DOWN movement is possible only when the tilt angle is within the range from -15° to +0.5° at the OUT-1 position.
*5: Movement is possible by pressing the pause operation button again.
*6: Free movement is disabled temporarily when the interlock is triggered from the UP direction.

No. 2D201-063E*E
33
3.7 List of Fuses Used for the Gantry
3.7.1 When the serial number is "S/N Axxxxx"

(1) Gantry stationary section fuses

Table 3.7.1-1

No. Fuse No. Rating Type Line used Mounting location Model
1 F111 1 A 250 V Time lag DC power supply (PS111), Figure 3.7.1-1 <2> ASF041*1A
Timer
2 F112 1 A 250 V Time lag DC power supply (PS111), ASF041*1A
Timer
3 F113 7 A 250 V Time lag DC power supplies ASF041*7A
(PS380, PS381, PS382)
4 F114 7 A 250 V Time lag DC power supplies ASF041*7A
(PS380, PS381, PS382)
5 F115 8 A 250 V Time lag Couch vertical movement ASF041*8A
and tilt motor
6 F116 8 A 250 V Time lag Couch vertical movement ASF041*8A
and tilt motor
7 F117 8 A 250 V Time lag Couch vertical movement ASF041*8A
and tilt motor
8 F120 3 A 250 V Normal DD motor servo amplifier ASF016-11
operation power supply
9 F121 2 A 250 V Normal DD motor servo amplifier ASF016*2A250V
sequence
10 F380 6.25 A 250 V Time lag KGTSM etc., +5 V (PS380) Figure 3.7.1-1 <1> ASF041*6R25A
11 F381 1 A 250 V Time lag Fan, MUDAT etc., +24 V ASF041*1A
(PS381)
12 F122 20 A 600 V Normal Rotation servo amplifier Figure 3.7.1-1 <2> AXW010-01
13 F123 20 A 600 V Normal Rotation servo amplifier AXW010-01
14 F124 20 A 600 V Normal Rotation servo amplifier AXW010-01

(2) Gantry stationary section fuses

Table 3.7.1-2

No. Fuse No. Rating Type Line used Mounting location Model
1 F741 6 A 250 V Normal Temperature controller and Figure 3.7.1-1 <3> ASF016-13
solid state detector
2 F742 6 A 250 V Normal Temperature controller and ASF016-13
solid state detector
3 F746 3 A 250 V Time lag MUDAT +5 V (PS750) ASF041*3A
4 F747 5 A 250 V Time lag MUDAT +5 V (PS750) ASF041*5A
5 F748 3 A 250 V Time lag MUDAT +5 V (PS750) ASF041*3A

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
34
(3) KGTSP PWB fuses

Table 3.7.1-3

No. Fuse No. Rating Type Line used Mounting location Model
1 F1 2A 250 V Time lag Tilt motor and brake Figure 3.7.1-1 <4> ASF016*2A250V
2 F2 2A 250 V Time lag Tilt motor and brake ASF016*2A250V
3 F3 2A 250 V Time lag Tilt motor and brake ASF016*2A250V
4 F4 1A 250 V Time lag Couch DOWN movement ASF041*1A
5 F5 1A 250 V Time lag Couch DOWN movement ASF041*1A
6 F6 4A 250 V Time lag Couch brake and clutch ASF041*4A
7 F7 1A 250 V Time lag Patient guide ASF041*1A
8 F9 1A 250 V Time lag External positioning ASF041*1A
projector
9 F10 1A 250 V Time lag X-ray ON lamp ASF041*1A
(hospital facility)

* For the patient couch CBTB-014A; F6: 2 A/250 V, model: ASF041*2A

(4) OPCONTA PWB fuses

Table 3.7.1-4

No. Fuse No. Rating Type Line used Mounting location Model
1 F1 3A 250 V Time lag Optical system motor Figure 3.7.1-1 <5> ASF041*3A
2 F2 3A 250 V Time lag Optical system motor ASF041*3A
3 F3 2A 250 V Time lag Internal positioning projector ASF041*2A
4 F4 3A 125 V Normal OPCONTA PWB 5 V ASF701*3A
5 F5 8A 125 V Normal OPCONTA PWB 3.3 V ASF701*8A

(5) GCIFA PWB fuses

Table 3.7.1-5

No. Fuse No. Rating Type Line used Mounting location Model
1 F1 7A 125 V Normal GCIFA PWB 5 V Figure 3.7.1-1 <6> ASF701*7A
2 F2 10A 125 V Normal GCIFA PWB 3.3 V ASF701*10A

(6) GCIFA-D PWB fuses

Table 3.7.1-6

No. Fuse No. Rating Type Line used Mounting location Model
1 F1 7A 125 V Normal GCIFA-D PWB 5 V Figure 3.7.1-1 <7> AXW701*007

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
35
Front view of the gantry Rear view of the gantry

<1> Gantry stationary section <5> OPCONTA PWB fuses (F1, F2, F3, F4, F5)
and fuses in the GTS unit
(F380, F381) <3> Fuses at the gantry rotation section <2> Gantry stationary section and fuses in the servo unit
(F741, F742, F746, F747, F748) (F111 to F117, F120 to F124)
<4> KGTSP PWB fuses (F1 to F7, F9, F10) at the rear of the KGTSM PWB
<6> GCIFA PWB fuses (F1, F2)
<7> GCIFA-D PWB fuses (F1)

Figure 3.7.1-1 Mounting locations of the gantry fuses

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D 36
3.7.2 When the serial number is "S/N Bxxxxx"

(1) Gantry stationary section fuses

Table 3.7.2-1

No. Fuse No. Rating Type Line used Mounting location Model
1 F111 1 A 250 V Time lag DC power supply (PS111), Figure 3.7.2-1 <2> ASF041*1A
Timer
2 F112 1 A 250 V Time lag DC power supply (PS111), ASF041*1A
Timer
3 F113 7 A 250 V Time lag DC power supplies ASF041*7A
(PS380, PS381, PS382)
4 F114 7 A 250 V Time lag DC power supplies ASF041*7A
(PS380, PS381, PS382)
5 F115 8 A 250 V Time lag Couch vertical movement ASF041*8A
and tilt motor
6 F116 8 A 250 V Time lag Couch vertical movement ASF041*8A
and tilt motor
7 F117 8 A 250 V Time lag Couch vertical movement ASF041*8A
and tilt motor
8 F120 3 A 250 V Normal DD motor servo amplifier ASF016-11
operation power supply
9 F121 2 A 250 V Normal DD motor servo amplifier ASF016*2A250V
sequence
10 F380 6.25 A 250 V Time lag KGTSM etc., +5 V (PS380) Figure 3.7.2-1 <1> ASF041*6R25A
11 F381 1 A 250 V Time lag Fan, MUDAT etc., +24 V ASF041*1A
(PS381)

(2) Gantry stationary section fuses

Table 3.7.2-2

No. Fuse No. Rating Type Line used Mounting location Model
1 F741 6 A 250 V Normal Temperature controller and Figure 3.7.2-1 <3> ASF016-13
solid state detector
2 F742 6 A 250 V Normal Temperature controller and ASF016-13
solid state detector
3 F746 3 A 250 V Time lag MUDAT +5 V (PS750) ASF041*3A
4 F747 5 A 250 V Time lag MUDAT +5 V (PS750) ASF041*5A
5 F748 3 A 250 V Time lag MUDAT +5 V (PS750) ASF041*3A

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
37
(3) KGTSP PWB fuses

Table 3.7.2-3

No. Fuse No. Rating Type Line used Mounting location Model
1 F1 2A 250 V Time lag Tilt motor and brake Figure 3.7.2-1 <4> ASF016*2A250V
2 F2 2A 250 V Time lag Tilt motor and brake ASF016*2A250V
3 F3 2A 250 V Time lag Tilt motor and brake ASF016*2A250V
4 F4 1A 250 V Time lag Couch DOWN movement ASF041*1A
5 F5 1A 250 V Time lag Couch DOWN movement ASF041*1A
6 F6 4A 250 V Time lag Couch brake and clutch ASF041*4A
7 F7 1A 250 V Time lag Patient guide ASF041*1A
8 F9 1A 250 V Time lag External positioning ASF041*1A
projector
9 F10 1A 250 V Time lag X-ray ON lamp ASF041*1A
(hospital facility)

* For the patient couch CBTB-014A; F6: 2 A/250 V, model: ASF041*2A

(4) OPCONTA PWB fuses

Table 3.7.2-4

No. Fuse No. Rating Type Line used Mounting location Model
1 F1 3A 250 V Time lag Optical system motor Figure 3.7.2-1 <5> ASF041*3A
2 F2 3A 250 V Time lag Optical system motor ASF041*3A
3 F3 2A 250 V Time lag Internal positioning projector ASF041*2A
4 F4 3A 125 V Normal OPCONTA PWB 5 V ASF701*3A
5 F5 8A 125 V Normal OPCONTA PWB 3.3 V ASF701*8A

(5) GCIFA PWB fuses

Table 3.7.2-5

No. Fuse No. Rating Type Line used Mounting location Model
1 F1 7A 125 V Normal GCIFA PWB 5 V Figure 3.7.2-1 <6> ASF701*7A
2 F2 10A 125 V Normal GCIFA PWB 3.3 V ASF701*10A

(6) GCIFA-D PWB fuses

Table 3.7.2-6

No. Fuse No. Rating Type Line used Mounting location Model
1 F1 7A 125 V Normal GCIFA-D PWB 5 V Figure 3.7.2-1 <7> AXW701*007

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
38
Front view of the gantry Rear view of the gantry

<1> Gantry stationary section <5> OPCONTA PWB fuses (F1, F2, F3, F4, F5)
and fuses in the GTS unit
(F380, F381) <3> Fuses at the gantry rotation section <2> Gantry stationary section and fuses in the servo unit
(F741, F742, F746, F747, F748) (F111 to F117, F120, F121)
<4> KGTSP PWB fuses (F1 to F7, F9, F10) at the rear of the KGTSM PWB
<6> GCIFA PWB fuses (F1, F2)
<7> GCIFA-D PWB fuses (F1)

Figure 3.7.2-1 Mounting locations of the gantry fuses

No. 2D201-063E*D
#*D 39
3.8 Gantry Power-Supply Sequence
The gantry power-supply sequence diagram is shown in figure 3.8-1.

For each protector position, breaker section, and the power connection sequence.

Î Refer to figure 3.8-1.

The gantry power-supply sequence is as follows:

(1) When the internal power-supply ON LED is lit, this indicates that power is
supplied to some parts of the gantry.

• While this LED is lit, the power-supply ON of the console will function.

(2) When the power switch of the console is turned ON

• Power is supplied to the entire gantry (rotation section and stationary section).
(MC111, MC112, and MC5 are turned ON.)

(3) When the power switch of the console is turned OFF

• The gantry stationary section is turned OFF simultaneously (MC111 and MC112
are turned OFF).

(a) When the DAS timer is turned OFF: (connected mode)

The gantry rotation section is turned OFF after one hour (power is supplied for
one hour by the off-delay timer).

(b) When the DAS timer is turned ON: (non-connected mode, at the time of
shipment)

The power within the gantry rotation section remains ON (in one hour,
however, the power supply to the oil cooler will be turned OFF).

(4) When the emergency switch is pressed

• The power of the entire gantry is turned OFF (MC111, MC112, and MC5 are
turned OFF).

• This status is retained until the power switch of the console is turned OFF.

(The emergency status is released by turning OFF power switch of the console.)

No. 2D201-063E*E
40
Gantry rotation section

TB2 HFG
NFB2

200 VAC
BRUSH CP740 DAS, DETECTOR
DAS-TIMER
ON/OFF
OPCONTA, MUDAT (R)
MC5 LCSR
OFF-DELAY TIMER
ON/OFF

START
RY111

EMERGENCY SW CONSOLE-POWER SW
OFF SI
MC111
SENSOR
P-ON
PS111 ON/OFF
24 VDC
Patient couch
TB1
NFB1

200 VAC KGTSM, MUDAT (S)
KGTSM, µ SW
OPERATING-PANEL, FAN

MC112 TILT MOTOR


MC111 ON condition
TILT.POWER CP5
The Console power switch is ON. M UP MOTOR
UP.POWER
M
DOWN.POWER
MC112 ON condition
MC111 is ON and the tilt µ switch is ON DOWN VALVE
and the KGTSM safety circuit is OK.
CP1
SLIDE MOTOR
S SERVO M
MC120
MC5 ON condition MC : MAGNET CONTACTOR ERROR
The Console power switch is ON or CP : CIRCUIT PROTECTOR NFB120 COVER SW / THERMAL SW
the off-delay timer is ON. NFB : NO FUSE BREAKER DD
MOTOR M
AMP
DD MOTOR

Figure 3.8-1 Gantry power supply sequence diagram

No. 2D201-063E*E
41
4. Outline of the PWBs
4.1 Settings of KGTSM Switches
4.1.1 When the patient couch is the CBTB-016A or CBTB-016B

LED67 LED66
SW1

White Blue Blue

SW21 SW12 SW11

SW31 SW32

DSW5 DSW11

DSW10 DSW1

DSW12 DSW4

Switches Settings during normal use Description


DSW1 1, 3, 6, and 7 are set to ON. Settings of the CN404, CN402 (for service use
and for the SS simulator) port
DSW4 1 is set to ON. System setting
DSW5 2 is set to ON. For switching the communication destination
SS (2 is ON) and PC (1 is ON)
DSW10 4 is set to ON. For gantry rotation maintenance
DSW11 2, 4, 5, 6, and 7 are set to ON. System setting
DSW12 All OFF For rotation fine adjustment
SW1 To be set upward For using the maintenance panel
SW21 KGTSM reset during OFF setting KGTSM reset

* SW11, SW12, SW31, and SW32 are provided for maintenance panel operation.
* The KGTSM drawing number differs depending on the patient couch type.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*A
42
4.1.2 When the patient couch is the CBTB-014A

LED67 LED66
SW1

White Blue Blue

SW21 SW12 SW11

SW31 SW32

DSW5 DSW11

DSW10 DSW1

DSW12 DSW4

Switches Settings during normal use Description


DSW1 1, 3, 6, and 7 are set to ON. Settings of the CN404, CN402 (for service use
and for the SS simulator) port
DSW4 1 is set to ON. System setting
DSW5 2 is set to ON. For switching the communication destination
SS (2 is ON) and PC (1 is ON)
DSW10 4 is set to ON. For gantry rotation maintenance
DSW11 2, 4, 5, and 7 are set to ON. System setting
DSW12 All OFF For rotation fine adjustment
SW1 To be set upward For using the maintenance panel
SW21 KGTSM reset during OFF setting KGTSM reset

* SW11, SW12, SW31, and SW32 are provided for maintenance panel operation.
* The KGTSM drawing number differs depending on the patient couch type.

No. 2D201-063E*E
43
4.2 KGTSM, Connectors, and LEDs
LED 2 HALT
LED 82 LPANERR LED 5 LOCAL
LED 59 UP LOCK LED 7 DPINTL
LED 60 DN LOCK LED 71 ALARM
LED 58 OT LOCK LED 70 FINISH

CN451 CN431
(KGTSP) (DD motor servo amp.) Power supply
CN409
LED 1 (RESET) CN491

(CT fluoroscopy footswitch)

LED 3 DTR
LED 8 STATUS
LED 25 INT5
LED 24 INT4
LED 20 AC200V ON
LED 18 UP
LED 17 DOWN2
LED 16 DOWN1
LED 15 HI-MASTER
LED 14 TENPLS
LED 13 TILTSTOP
LED 12 T-BRK OFF
LED 11 TILT ON
LED 10 TILT+ON
LED 9 TILT-ON
LED 36 SERVO ON
LED 33 BRK OFF
LED 55 T+LOCK
LED 56 T-LOCK
(Patient couch) CN
LED 57 IN LOCK 456
CN (Right-side operating
406 panel)

(Projector angle) CN
459
CN (Left-side operating panel)
407

LED 35 SPEED ON
CN408 LED 73 SSERVO ON
LED 38 POWER ON
(Patient couch vertical LED 37 CONDI. OK
movement foot SW)

(For servicing) CN
404

CN
(For SS generator)
LED 40 POSI-PLS
LED 41 GVSEL A
LED 42 GVSEL B
LED 48 SLIDE IN

LED 83 OPTSH

LED 49 LOCAL 2
LED 61 PSEL A
LED 63 BGN
LED 62 PSEL B
LED 65 XRAY-ON
LED 64 VTRIG
LED 93 RENABLE
LED 69 SLIDE OUT

LED 75 SLIDE CHK

LED 27 100kHz
LED 54 HARD ERR

402
LED 89 R-ENCODER
LED 91 DDPLS LED 21 INT1
LED 92 FAULT LED 22 INT2
LED 26 INT6 LED 23 INT3
LED 81 RPANERR

(TAPE SW ROTA
POSITION SENSOR) (DD motor) CN
(TILT encoder) (GCIFA) 433
CN432 CN454 CN401

Figure 4.2-1 KGTSM PWB

No. 2D201-063E*E
44
Table 4.2-1 List of KGTSM LEDs (1/5)

LED Name Meaning/operation In idle status Remarks


1 RESET GTS PWB reset signal: o OFF The LED should not remain
When resetting is performed, the LED lights. lit.
2 HALT Communication CPU (Z80) halting: o OFF The LED should not remain
When the CPU is halted, the LED lights. lit.
3 DTR GTS communication enabling (DATA TERMINAL READY): * ON
Communication is enabled when the LED is lit.
5 LOCAL Local mode signal from the operating panel (after gating): o OFF
When the system enters local mode, the LED lights.
7 DPINTL Access of 68K to DPRAM (unused address): * ON
When DPRAM is accessed, the LED lights.
8 STATUS Status display signal from GTS to SS: * Blinking
When the LED is blinking, status signals are being transmitted.
9 TILT-ON Output of - tilting operation signal: o OFF
When the LED is lit, the operation signal is being output.
10 TILT+ON Output of + tilting operation signal: o OFF
When the LED is lit, the operation signal is being output.
11 TILT ON Output of tilting operation signal (output of master phase): o OFF
When the LED is lit, the operation signal is being output.
12 T-BRK OFF Tilt motor brake releasing: o OFF
When the brake is released, the LED is lit.
13 TILT STOP Tilt stop signal (0° step tilt): o OFF
Stop signal output when the LED is lit
14 TEN PLS Tilt encoder pulse signal: Depends upon
When the LED is blinking, pulses are being output. the status
15 HI-MASTER Output of upward and downward movement signals (output of master SSR): o OFF
When the LED is lit, the operation signal is being output.

No. 2D201-063E*E
45
Table 4.2-1 List of KGTSM LEDs (2/5)

LED Name Meaning/operation In idle status Remarks


16 DOWN 1 Output of downward movement signal (valve 1): o OFF
When the LED is lit, the operation signal is being output.
17 DOWN 2 Output of downward movement signal (valve 2): o OFF
When the LED is lit, the operation signal is being output.
18 UP Output of upward movement signal: o OFF
When the LED is lit, the operation signal is being output.
20 200 VAC ON 200 V power line (HARD-ERR, power supply to the motor is interrupted using * ON When an error occurs, the
SW4): LED goes out.
When 200 V power line is connected, the LED lights.
21 INT 1 Interruption of level 1 (GNS, used for maintenance): o OFF The LED should not remain
An interruption is ouput when the LED lights. lit.
22 INT 2 Interruption of level 2 (sensor, interlock): o OFF The LED should not remain
An interruption is output when the LED lights. lit.
23 INT 3 Interruption of level 3 (local control system timer GA): o OFF The LED should not remain
An interruption signal is output when the LED lights. lit.
24 INT 4 Interruption of level 4 (DP RAM: Z80): o OFF The LED should not remain
When an interruption is output, the LED lights. lit.
25 INT 5 Interruption of level 5 (DAS, rotation): o OFF The LED should not remain
When an interruption is output, the LED lights. lit.
26 INT 6 Interruption of level 6 (system clock): o OFF The LED should not remain
When an interruption is output, the LED lights. lit.
27 100 kHz 100 kHz clock signal: * Blinking
When the LED is blinking, the clock signal is being output.
33 BRK OFF Servo motor brake OFF signal: o OFF Not used
Break is OFF when the LED is lit.
35 SPEED ON Output of voltage (for speed) to servo amplifier: o OFF Not used
When the LED is lit, voltage is being applied.

No. 2D201-063E*E
46
Table 4.2-1 List of KGTSM LEDs (3/5)

LED Name Meaning/operation In idle status Remarks


36 SERVO ON Output of servo system ON signal (ON: servo-lock, OFF: servo-free): o OFF
When servo-lock signals are output, the LED lights.
37 CONDI. OK Servo unit servo ready status: * ON
When the servo ready signal is acceptable, the LED lights.
38 POWER ON Error status of the servo unit: * ON The LED goes out when an
When the LED is lit, there are no errors. error occurs.
40 POSI-PLS Input of rotation position sensor: o OFF
When the LED is lit, the sensor is being interrupted.
41 GVSEL A Gantry VTRIG generation mode selection o OFF
LED41: OFF, LED42: ON = Pulses for 0.4-second rotation have been
selected. (15 E-PULSE 1 GVTRG)
LED41: OFF, LED42: OFF = Pulses for 0.5, 0.6, 0.75-second rotation have
been selected. (4 E-PULSE 1 GVTRG)
42 GVSEL B LED41: ON, LED42: OFF = Pulses for 1.0-second rotation have been o OFF
selected. (9 E-PULSE 1 GVTRG)
LED41: ON, LED42: ON = Pulses for 1.5-second rotation have been
selected. (6 E-PULSE 1 GVTRG)
48 SLIDE IN Output of couch top inward movement pulses: * ON
When the LED is blinking, pulses are being output.
49 LOCAL 2 Local control signal from the operating panel (2nd line): o OFF
When local mode signals are input, the LED lights.
54 HARD ERR Error detection status of the safety circuit (100 V, 200 V line OFF): o OFF When an error occurs, the
When an error occurs, the LED lights. LED lights.
55 T+ LOCK + tilting interlock status: Depends on
When + tilting operation is disabled, the LED lights. the status
56 T- LOCK - tilting interlock status: Depends on
When - tilting operation is disabled, the LED lights. the status
57 IN LOCK Couch top inward movement interlock status: Depends on
When inward movement is disabled, the LED lights. the status

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D 47
Table 4.2-1 List of KGTSM LEDs (4/5)

LED Name Meaning/operation In idle status Remarks


58 OT LOCK Couch top outward movement interlock status: Depends on
When outward movement is disabled, the LED lights. the status
59 UP LOCK Couch top upward movement interlock status: Depends on
When upward movement is disabled, the LED lights. the status
60 DN LOCK Couch top downward movement interlock status: Depends on
When downward movement is disabled, the LED lights. the status
61 PSEL A VTRIG selection o OFF
LED61: OFF, LED62: OFF = Internal clock pulses are used as VTRIG.
62 PSEL B LED61: ON, LED62: OFF = Gantry pulses are used as VTRIG. o OFF
LED61: OFF, LED62: ON = Couch pulses are used as VTRIG.
63 BGN Output of BGN (acquisition start) signal: o OFF
When the BGN signal is output, the LED lights.
64 VTRIG Output of VTRIG (VIEW-TRIG): * Blinking
When the LED is blinking, pulses are being output.
65 XRAY ON Output of X-RAY ON signal to XC: * ON
When the LED is lit, the system is in X-RAY OFF status.
69 SLIDE OUT Output of couch top outward movement pulses: * ON
When the LED is blinking, pulses are being output.
70 FINISH Slice operation: * ON
The LED lights when the operation is completed.
71 ALARM Output of a slide servo error: * ON
The LED is lit when the slide servo motor is normal.
73 SSERVON Output indicating that the slide servo motor is turned on * ON
(Operable when the slide servo motor is ON):
When the LED is lit, the slide servo motor is ON.
75 SLIDE CHK For abnormality detection to ensure safety: o OFF If an abnormality occurs, the
OUT: Normal status LED lamp changes from OFF
(out) to ON (light).
81 RPANERR Not used -
82 LPANERR Not used -

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D 48
Table 4.2-1 List of KGTSM LEDs (5/5)

LED Name Meaning/operation In idle status Remarks


83 OPTSH Tilt, slide, and vertical movement signals from the operating panel o OFF
(for dual protection):
When the LED is lit, the signals given on the left are entered.
89 R-ENCODER Pulse input of the rotation encoder: Uncertain
When the LED is blinking, pulses are input.
91 DD PLS  Undefined Not used
92 FAULT  o OFF Not used
93 RENABLE Rotation pulse correction selection: * ON
When the LED is out, the correction circuit is ON.

No. 2D201-063E*E
49
4.3 VRs and Test Pins (TP) of the KGTSM PWB

TP2 TP8

TP40
TP9

VR7 VR6
VR4
VR5 VR1
TP3

TP1
TP7
TP41

TP60

TP50
TP51
TP52
TP4 TP5(0V)
TP43
TP46

VR No. Name Meaning (contents)


VR1 ROTA SPEED For rotation speed adjustment (Not used)
VR4 PROJ/OFFSET For offset adjustment of the projector angle display
VR5 PROJ/GAIN For gain adjustment of the projector angle display
VR6 HEIG/OFFSET For offset adjustment of the couch height display
VR7 HEIG/GAIN For gain adjustment of the couch height display

No. 2D201-063E*E
50
TP No. Name Meaning (contents)
TP1 0V Power supply 0 V (DC power supply)
TP2 0V Power supply 0 V (DC power supply)
TP3 0V Power supply 0 V (DC power supply)
TP4 0V Power supply 0 V (DC power supply)
TP5 0V Power supply 0 V (DC power supply)
TP7 +5 V Power supply +5 V (DC power supply)
TP8 +15 V +15 V (DC/DC power supply output)
TP9 -15 V -15 V (DC/DC power supply output)
TP40 (SPEED DATA 0 V) Not used
TP41 (SPEED DATA V) Not used
TP43 R-ENCODER DD motor (rotation) pulse
TP46 POSI-PLS Rotation reference sensor signal
TP50 VTRIG Output of VTRIG (VIEW-TRIG)
TP51 XRAY ON Output of X-RAY ON signal to XC
TP52 BGN Output of BGN (acquisition start) signal
TP60 DDPLS Not used

4.4 Switch Setting of the OPCONTA PWB


Î Refer to Service manual
(Data transfer section volume)
2D201-059E.

4.5 Connectors, LEDs, Test Pins (TP), and DIP Switches of the
OPCONTA PWB
Î Refer to Service manual
(Data transfer section volume)
2D201-059E.

4.6 Switch Setting of GCIFA


Î Refer to Service manual
(Data transfer section volume)
2D201-059E.

4.7 GCIFA & GCIFA-D Connectors, LEDs, Check Terminals


(TP), and DIP Switches
Î Refer to Service manual
(Data transfer section volume)
2D201-059E.

No. 2D201-063E*E
51
4.8 Setting Short Pins and Adjusting Variable Resistors on
the KGTSP
(1) Setting JP1

By setting JP1 short pins, the lighting status of the wall-mounted lamp and the
X-ON lamp can be changed. The lighting status of the wall-mounted lamp and the
X-ON lamp are given below. Note that these status are only for the case where the
wall-mounted lamp is connected to the gantry.

JP1 setting Status Wall-mounted lamp X-ON lamp


Short between Ready Lit
pins 1 and 2
X-ON (exposure) Lit
Short between Ready
pins 3 and 4
X-ON (exposure) Lit Lit
Short between Ready Stays lit while power is ON *1)
pins 5 and 6
X-ON (exposure) Stays lit while power is ON *1) Lit
Short between Ready
pins 7 and 8
X-ON (exposure) Lit

*1) This lamp stays lit while power is supplied to the gantry stationary section.
*2) Pins 5 and 6 are shorted when the equipment is shipped from the factory.

(2) Adjusting variable resistors

VR Function
VR1 Adjusts amplification of the front microphone signal.
VR2 Adjusts amplification of the central microphone signal.
VR3 Adjusts amplification of the rear microphone signal.

• VR1, VR2, and VR3 are set to an intermediate value at the time of shipment.
Normally, they do not need to be adjusted.

No. 2D201-063E*E
52
CN511
(2)
CN514
CN503 (2)
(4) CN502
(9) CN515
CN501 (12)
(40)

1
2
CN512 CN517
(14) (4)
JP1

CN504(4)
7
8
CN516
(12)

CN509 VR1 VR2 CN510(3)


(9)

VR3 CN507(9)

CN508
(4)

CN505(6)
CN506
(9)

Figure 4.8-1 KGTSP PWB

No. 2D201-063E*E
53
5. Use of the KGTSM Maintenance
Panel
5.1 Important Notices
(1) When the panel switch SW1 is set to ON, the KGTSM maintenance panel cannot
be operated from the operator panels or from the console.

(2) When the panel switch SW1 is turned ON while the gantry or couch is in motion,
the gantry or couch stops.

(3) When slide out movement is performed from the maintenance panel with the
patient couch located at a position closer to the OUT end than the OUT-2 position,
the patient couch slows down and stops due to the safety function.

(4) After using the maintenance panel, be sure to reset the KGTSM.

(5) Do not turn OFF the panel switch (SW1) until the indicated operation is terminated.

5.2 Procedures to Use the Maintenance Panel


<Work procedure>

(1) Set the lever of the panel switch SW1 on the KGTSM to the PANEL ON position
(downward).

Ö The maintenance panel can be used.

(2) Set switch SW32 to select an object (function) to move.

Ö Indicator LED66 shows the value Î Refer to table 5.2-1 "List of


set by this switch SW32. maintenance panel functions".

(3) Set switch SW31 to select a mode. (See "List of maintenance panel functions".)

Ö Indicator LED67 shows the value Î Refer to table 5.2-1 "List of


set by this switch SW31. maintenance panel functions".

(4) Operate switches SW11 (SET) and SW12 (SCAN).

Ö Check how the selected function is Î Refer to table 5.2-2


carried out by these switches. "Maintenance panel operations".
Ö The test rotation, scanoscope, and
scanner start by these switches.

(5) Carry out the selected function in the selected mode.

(End)

No. 2D201-063E*E
54
(6) Set the lever of the panel switch SW1 on the KGTSM to the PANEL OFF position
(upward).

Ö "F" is displayed on the 7-segment LEDs (LEDs 66 and 67).

(7) Press the RESET switch (SW21) or turn OFF the power.

Ö The display of the 7-segment LEDs (LED66 and LED67) turns from FF to 88.

<Switches used for maintenance panel operations>

(1) SW1 (PANEL ON)

When this switch is set ON, the


67 66
maintenance panel can be used.

(2) SW32 (FUNCTION SET) LED67 LED66


Used to select an object SW1
(e.g., wedge) to move. PANEL ON

(3) SW31 (MODE SET)

Used to start the selected


operation.
SW21 SW12 SW11
(4) SW11 (SET) RESET SCAN SET

Starts operation.

(5) SW12 (SCAN)

Press this switch together with


SW11 to rotate the gantry.
SW31 SW32

No. 2D201-063E*E
55
Table 5.2-1 Functions of the maintenance panel

Function Contents of Operation mode


mode function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 WEDGE Small Large DR
2 DAS TEST TEST GAIN1 GAIN2 GAIN3 GAIN4 GAIN5 GAIN6 GAIN7
3 SLIT 4×8L 3×8L 3×8S 2×8L 2×8S 1×8S 0.5×8S 0.5×2S Sensor
position
4 DETECTOR 4 mm 3 mm 2 mm 1 mm 0.5 mm
5 TILT + -
6 T-ROTA ON
7 SCANO 0° 90° 180° 270°
8 SCAN (2.0 s) 1.5 s 1.0 s 0.75 s 0.5 s 0.6 s *0.4 s
9 PROJECTOR ON OFF
A PROJECTOR + -
ANGLE
B SLIDE SLOW SLOW FAST FAST AUTO *SCANO *SCANO
IN OUT IN OUT SLIDE IN OUT
C HEIGHT UP DOWN
D OFFSET OFF-
SET
E FREE, FREE RE- CLEAR
0CLEAR MOTE

Items marked * are for the CBTB-016A or CBTB-016B.

CAUTION: When SW32 on the maintenance panel is set to 8, do not perform scanning
more than 10 times in succession.
After shutdown, wait for at least 30 seconds before restarting the system.
Otherwise, the controller for the DD motor may be damaged.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
56
Table 5.2-2 Maintenance panel operations

Setting Operation when the


Start Operation (when the related switch is turned
on Function PANEL switch is
switch ON or OFF)
SW32 turned OFF
1 Wedge SET The slit moves until it reaches the end once Keeps on moving till
the SET switch is pressed. it reaches the end.
2 DAS test SET Starts when the SET switch is pressed. Stops in the current
status.
3 Slit SET The slit moves until it reaches the end once Keeps on moving till
the SET switch is pressed. it reaches the end.
4 Detector SET Starts when the SET switch is pressed. Remains in the
switching current lamp status.
5 Tilt SET Tilting is carried out while the SET switch is Immediately stops.
pressed.
(Tilting stops when the SET switch is
released.)
-1
6 Test SET & Rotation at 1 min (rpm) is carried out while Immediately stops.
rotation SCAN these switches are pressed.
(Tilting stops when the switches are released.)
7 Scano SET & The scano moves until it reaches the end once Keeps on moving till
SCAN these switches are pressed. it reaches the end.
8 Scan SET & Scanning is carried out while these switches Gradually reduces
SCAN are pressed. When the switches are released, speed and stops.
the gantry rotation slows down and the gantry
stops at the TUBE TOP position.
9 Light SET Lights when the SET switch is pressed. Remains in the
current lamp status.
A Light SET Moves while the SET switch is pressed. Stops Immediately stops.
angle immediately when the SET switch is released.
B Horizontal SET Moves while the SET switch is pressed. Stops Gradually reduces
movement immediately when the SET switch is released. speed and stops.
C Vertical SET Moves while the SET switch is pressed. Stops Immediately stops.
movement immediately when the SET switch is released.
D Offset SET This is set when the SET switch is pressed.
E Slide idle SET Starts or is zero-cleared when the SET switch Remains in the
is pressed. current status.
F

*1 Do not change the setting of switch SW32 while a selected function is carried out.
*2 Do not turn OFF the PANEL switch before the SET switch (and the SCAN switch) is
released.
*3 Be sure to reset the GTS after using the maintenance panel.

No. 2D201-063E*E
57
5.3 Procedures for Use of KGTSM Maintenance Mode
5.3.1 Outline

The PC connected to the KGTSM can be used for operation of functions in almost the
same manner as the maintenance panel.

<Materials required>

1) PC

2) Service cable (GR-1, as standard)

3) Programs: Hyper Terminal etc.

<Procedure to check>

1) Connect CN404 of the KGTSM to the COM port of the PC using the service cable.

2) Start the Hyper Terminal program on the PC.


(For the start-up procedures, refer to subsection 4.6 "Setting the Hyper Terminal" of
the installation manual (2C201-150E).)

3) The following message is displayed on the PC and maintenance mode starts.

***GTS maintenance mode***

0: Stop rotation, q: Quit maintenance mode.

Select SW32 No. :

No. 2D201-063E*E
58
5.3.2 Use of maintenance mode

(1) After the following message, enter the function No. for which maintenance/checks
are to be performed.

(Refer to table 5.2-1 "Functions of the maintenance panel" for details of the Nos. to
be input.)

Select SW32 No.: × [Enter]

(2) Input the mode Nos. after the following message.

(Refer to table 5.2-1 "Functions of the maintenance panel" for details of the Nos. to
be input.)

Select SW31 No.: × [Enter]

(3) When SW32 is set to the following functions, a confirmation message is displayed
before operation is performed.

• Test rotation (6)


• Scanogram position (7)
• Gantry rotation (8)

[Confirmation message]

Are you sure? Y/N?:

When Y is entered, the gantry starts operating.

5.3.3 Limitations

(1) Control of the following functions is impossible in maintenance mode.

• Tilt (5)
• Patient-couch slide (B)
• Patient couch vertical movement (C)

(2) To stop gantry rotation, perform entry as follows.

Select SW32 No.: 0 [Enter]


Select SW31 No.: 0 [Enter]

(3) Entering "q" terminates maintenance mode.

(4) After maintenance mode terminates, set the panel switch (SW1) on the KGTSM
upward (PANEL OFF) to reset the KGTSM.

No. 2D201-063E*E
59
6. Obtaining KGTSM Status
Information
6.1 KGTSM Messages
6.1.1 Outline

The KGTSM PWB sends a status message to the PC when an error occurs, when
scanning is executed, or when the gantry rotation speed is checked.
The following is a list of such messages and their meaning.

<Materials required>

1) PC

2) Service cable (GR-1, as standard)

3) Programs: Hyper Terminal etc.

<Procedure to collect the messages>

1) Connect the COM port of the PC to connector CN404 of the KGTSM PWB, using the
service cable.

2) Start the Hyper Terminal program on the PC.


(For the start-up procedures, refer to subsection 4.6 "Setting the Hyper Terminal" of
the installation manual (2C201-150E).)

6.1.2 Message output timing

Error messages are displayed only when the corresponding errors are recognized.
(Exception: Messages for the servo-amp error and 100 V/200 V power off error remain
displayed.) After an error occurs, the error status (see subsection 6.2) can be
confirmed in detail by connecting the PC.
(The message remains displayed when the DD motor detects a warning error or a
100V/200V OFF error.)

No. 2D201-063E*E
60
6.1.3 Typical error messages

The following are typical error messages (* indicates that the message is not an error
message).

DISP: 100 V/200 V power off The 100 V/200 V power is OFF.

DISP: SS/ADI hang-up signal on An SS/ADI watchdog error has been


detected.

DISP: MUDAT ROTSOT fail An error has been detected between the
rotation section and the stationary section.

DISP: MUDAT SOTROT fail An error has been detected between the
stationary section and the rotation section.

DISP: MUDAT CHERR Detects a channel change error.

DISP: MUDAT DCLKERR Detects an abnormality of the number of


acquired data.

MAIN: Dip-SW setup error (DSW11) Error in DIP-SW11 setting.

MAIN: hard timer check error A hardware timer error is detected in the
startup check.

MAIN: D.P.R. check error The KGTSM hardware is abnormal.

MAIN: Fluoroscopy safety check error The CT fluoroscopy safety circuit is


abnormal.

ROTE: DD motor communication error Communication with the DD motor is


abnormal.

ROTE: speed error The gantry rotation speed has exceeded


the control range.

*ROTE: current: 0xffff 0xffff indicates the speed data at the time
std: 0xhhhh of the first speed check (std stands for
standard value).

ROTE: placement error Designation error of the gantry stop


position

ROTE: position sensor error The position sensor cannot be recognized.

ROTE: Alarm data > 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff When a DD motor error occurs, the
0xff 0xff contents are displayed.

ROTE: Alarm receive An error signal from the DD motor is


detected.

ROTE: NAK receive (0xff, 0xff) NAK is received from the DD motor.

ROTE: illegal response data Abnormal data is received from the DD


motor.

ROTE: DD sequence error Control of communication with the DD


motor is abnormal.

ROTE: ACK/NAK receive over time No response from the DD motor.

No. 2D201-063E*E
61
ROTE: Status data > 0xff 0xff 0xff When the DD motor status is abnormal, the
contents are displayed.

ROTE: Receive over time No response from the DD motor.

ROTE: illegal receive data Abnormal data is received from the DD


motor.

DAS: Mat Switch state is abnormal XX The mat switch or tape switch was touched
when Helical/Scano was to be started.

DAS: X-ray ON yet DAS port status X-ray generation does not stop.
XXXX

DAS: offset L1 time-out COUNTER Offset acquisition does not start.


XXXX COM-PRE XXXX

DAS: offset CP1 order error Offset acquisition interrupt abnormal

DAS: offset CP2 order error Offset acquisition interrupt abnormal

DAS: offset time-out COUNTER Offset acquisition time-out


XXXX COM-PRE XXXX

DAS: offset move time-out Offset transfer time-out


XXXXXXXX

DAS: scan L1 order error Data acquisition interrupt abnormal

DAS: scan L2 order error Data acquisition interrupt abnormal

DAS: scan L1 time-out COUNTER Data acquisition does not start.


XXXX COM-PRE XXXX

DAS: scan L2 time-out COUNTER Data acquisition time-out


XXXX COM-PRE XXXX

DAS: Gate Array init status Fail XX Data acquisition hardware abnormal

DAS: scano L1 order error Scano acquisition interrupt abnormal

DAS: scano L2 order error Scano acquisition interrupt abnormal

DAS: scano L2 time-out COUNTER X-ray exposure does not start.


XXXX COM-PRE XXXX

DAS: scano L1 time-out COUNTER Scano acquisition does not start.


XXXX COM-PRE XXXX

DAS: scano second L2 time-out Scano acquisition time-out


COUNTER
XXXX COM-PRE XXXX

DAS: helical slide L1 time-out Helical starting position cannot be


recognized.

DAS: helical L1 order error Helical acquisition interrupt abnormal

DAS: helical L2 order error Helical acquisition interrupt abnormal

No. 2D201-063E*E
62
DAS: helical L1 time-out COUNTER Helical acquisition does not start.
XXXX COM-PRE XXXX

DAS: helical L2 time-out COUNTER Helical acquisition time-out


XXXX COM-PRE XXXX

DAS: helical speed check error Couch speed error during helical scan
(XXXX)

*DAS: offset done L1 ∆∆ Acquisition starts from the ∆∆th pulse.


L2 XX VIEW †† Acquisition completes at the XXth pulse.
POS ∇∇ COM-PRE ◊◊ †† is the number of acquired views that
scan KGTSM has recognized.
scano ∇∇ is the couch pulse according to data
helical acquisition.
◊◊ is the number of acquired views that
COM-PRE has transferred.

SLIDE: 100 ms interval error Watchdog error of the operation panel

SLIDE: time-out Time-out during couch movement

SLIDE: CP2 interrupt Couch overrun of 10 mm or more

SLIDE: hardware failure The couch moved to the opposite direction.


(direction error) (10 mm or more)

SLIDE: Can't move. Movement disabled due to error.


(Error is 000000XX.)
D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
D5 : Slide overrun, servo abnormal, or
movement in reverse direction
D4 : Stop position error
D3 : Watchdog error
D2 : Slide time-out
D1 : Data error
D0 : Interlock interruption

SLIDE: Servo Error (0xXX) Couch slide servo abnormal

TILT: 100 ms interval error Watchdog error of operating panel

TILT: time-out Time-out during gantry tilting

TILT: Encoder time-out Gantry tilt encoder does not function.

TILT: Limit interrupt Detection of gantry tilt limits

TILT: hardware failure Gantry tilting in reverse direction.


(direction error) (2° or more)

No. 2D201-063E*E
63
TILT: Can't move. Movement disabled due to error.
(Error is 000000XX.)
D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
D5 : Movement in reverse direction
D4 : Limit error
D3 : Watchdog error
D2 : Tilt movement time-out
Encoder time-out
D1 : Data error
D0 : Interlock interruption

HITE: 100 ms interval error Watchdog error of operating panel

HITE: time-out Time-out during vertical movement of couch

HITE: hardware failure Couch vertical movement in reverse


(direction error) direction. (10 mm or more)

HITE Can't move. Movement disabled due to error.


(Error is 000000XX.)
D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
D5 : Movement in reverse direction
D4 : Not used
D3 : Watchdog error
D2 : Vertical movement time-out
D1 : Data error
D0 : Interlock interruption

GND: Internal light error No response to request for internal light


projection

GNS: Polling error No response to status request to OPCONTA

GNS: communication error Error in communication with OPCONTA

GNS: No response from GNS board No response from OPCONTA

GNS: Ack/Nak text receive time-out No response from OPCONTA

GNS: retry over times The specified number of retry times was
exceeded during attempts to communicate
with OPCONTA.

GNS-CHILD: Nak received XX XX The request data sent to OPCONTA is


abnormal.

GNS-CHILD: command time-out mail: No request for termination from OPCONTA.


XXXXXXXX

GNS-CHILD: slit error [0xXX:C] Slit action abnormal.

GNS-CHILD: action expect error OPCONTA action different from that specified

GNS-CHILD: wedge error [0xXX:0] Wedge operation is abnormal.

GNS-CHILD: detector error [0xXX:C] Switching operation of the detector is


abnormal.

No. 2D201-063E*E
64
6.1.4 DD motor error messages

Detailed information concerning a DD motor error can be learned from the


corresponding error message displayed on the terminal monitor.
Details concerning error messages and how to interpret the messages are described
below.

*: If any of the following errors occurs, the power of the DD motor is turned OFF.
If such an error occurs during rotation, the motor stops due to inertia.

6.1.4.1 When the serial number is "S/N Axxxxx"

Error messages

ROTE: Alarm data > 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff............. Error data of error Nos. 1 to 6
0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff............. Error data of error Nos. 7 to 12
0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff ............ Error data of error Nos. 13 to 16

(1) Where 0xff (hexadecimal notation) is displayed as error data, and there are no
errors, 0x30 is displayed.
Errors are displayed using the 4 lower-order bits. Refer to table 6.1.4.1-1.

Table 6.1.4.1-1 Error data display and bit display indicating the corresponding
error

Error data 4 lower order bits Meaning


0x30 0000 No error
0x31 0001 Error in the 0th bit
0x32 0010 Error in the 1st bit
0x33 0011 Errors in the 1st and 0th bits
0x34 0100 Error in the 2nd bit
0x35 0101 Errors in the 2nd and 0th bits
0x36 0110 Errors in the 2nd and 1st bits
0x37 0111 Errors in the 2nd, 1st, and 0th bits
0x38 1000 Error in the 3rd bit
0x39 1001 Errors in the 3rd and 0th bits
0x3a 1010 Errors in the 3rd and 1st bits
0x3b 1011 Errors in the 3rd, 1st, and 0th bits
0x3c 1100 Errors in the 3rd and 2nd bits
0x3d 1101 Errors in the 3rd, 2nd, and 0th bits
0x3e 1110 Errors in the 3rd, 2nd, and 1st bits
0x3f 1111 Errors in the 3rd, 2nd, 1st, and 0th bits

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
65
(2) Contents of each of the errors corresponding to the error message numbers are
described in table 6.1.4.1-2.

Table 6.1.4.1-2 Contents of errors indicated by error messages


(When the serial number is "S/N A*****")

Error
Error in the 3rd bit Error in the 2nd bit Error in the 1st bit Error in the 0th bit
No.
1 4: Abnormal 3: Abnormal PN power 2: Overvoltage error 1: Overcurrent error
hardware in the supply
servo amplifier
2 8: Abnormal 7: Abnormal hardware 6: Abnormal 5: Abnormal
hardware in the in the servo hardware in the hardware in the
servo amplifier amplifier servo amplifier servo amplifier
3 12: Abnormal 11: Abnormal 10: Abnormal 9: Excessive heating
hardware in the hardware in the feedback resistor of the feedback
servo amplifier servo amplifier resistor
4 33: Abnormal 32: Abnormal 30: Present value 31: Instruction value
hardware in the hardware in the counter over counter over
servo amplifier servo amplifier
5 16: Speed amplifier 15: Overcurrent error 14: During braking 13: Abnormal
saturation hardware in the
servo amplifier
6 20: Over speed 19: Abnormal 18: Short-time 17: Heated motor
hardware in the overload
servo amplifier
7 24: Abnormal 23: Abnormal 22: Abnormal 21: Abnormal
hardware in the hardware in the hardware in the deviation counter
servo amplifier servo amplifier servo amplifier
8 0: Not defined 27: Abnormal 26: Abnormal 25: Abnormal
hardware in the parameter hardware in the
servo amplifier servo amplifier
9 43: Abnormal 42: Abnormal 41: Abnormal 40: Encoder
hardware in the hardware in the hardware in the disconnection
servo amplifier servo amplifier servo amplifier error
10 41: Abnormal 46: Abnormal 45: Abnormal 44: Abnormal
hardware in the hardware in the hardware in the hardware in the
servo amplifier servo amplifier servo amplifier servo amplifier
11 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 47: Abnormal 48: Encode setting
hardware in the error
servo amplifier
12 48: Encoder 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 0: Not defined
initialization error
13 Speed error Overshooting Z phase (sensor) not Abnormal positioning
being input
14 901, 902, 909: 910 to 916, 918, 924, Abnormal hardware in 0: Not defined
Abnormal hardware in 925: Abnormal the servo amplifier (no
the servo amplifier hardware in the servo number)
amplifier
15 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 0: Not defined
16 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 0: Not defined

(3) The number preceding the contents of each error in table 6.1.4.1-2 is the error
code displayed on the LED of the servo amplifier. (Errors with no numbers can be
checked by the KGTSM PWB only.) For the method for displaying the error codes
and the history at the servo amplifier, refer to subsection 7.5 of this manual.

Î Refer to subsection 7.5.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
66
(4) The meanings of the errors described in table 6.1.4.1-2 are described in table
6.1.4.1-3. For details, refer to subsection 7.6.1.3 of this manual.

Î Refer to subsection 7.6.1.3.

Table 6.1.4.1-3 Meanings of the error contents

Contents of error Meaning


Abnormal hardware in the servo This bit set to 1 indicates that the circuit in the servo amplifier
amplifier malfunctions.
Abnormal PN power supply Drop of the input line voltage or insufficient line capacity
Overvoltage error High input voltage, excessive load inertia
Overcurrent error IPM malfunction, shorted motor cable, ground fault, ambient
temperature of more than 55°C
Abnormal feedback resistor Disconnection of the feedback resistor
Excessive heating of the Excessively short acceleration/deceleration interval
feedback resistor
Present value counter over, Inappropriate parameter setting, abnormal servo amplifier
instruction value counter over
Speed amplifier saturation Maximum current flowing in the motor for more than 3
seconds, excessive load, low pulse accuracy
Overcurrent error Motor current exceeding 120% of the current limit
During braking Incorrect connection of the dynamic brake
Over speed This error occurs if 120% of the maximum number of
rotations is exceeded.
Short-time overload Rotation is locked.
Heated motor Excessive load, excessively short acceleration/deceleration
interval
Abnormal deviation counter Abnormal servo amplifier, excessive load
Abnormal parameter Abnormal servo amplifier (incorrect parameter)
Encoder disconnection error, Disconnection of the encoder cable, malfunction of the
encoder initialization error encoder
Speed error Deceleration and stoppage if ±3% of the specified speed is
exceeded (the servo amplifier does not display this error)
Overshooting The current in the servo amplifier increases at the time of
stoppage (the servo amplifier does not display this error).
Abnormal positioning This error occurs if ±1° of the specified stop position is
exceeded.
Z phase (sensor) not being input The position sensor signal is not input.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
67
6.1.4.2 When the serial number is "S/N Bxxxxx"

Error messages

ROTE: Alarm data > 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff............. Error data of error Nos. 1 to 6
0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff............. Error data of error Nos. 7 to 12
0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff ............ Error data of error Nos. 13 to 16

(1) Where 0xff (hexadecimal notation) is displayed as error data, and there are no
errors, 0x30 is displayed.
Errors are displayed using the 4 lower-order bits. Refer to table 6.1.4.2-1.

Table 6.1.4.2-1 Error data display and bit display indicating the corresponding
error

Error data 4 lower order bits Meaning


0x30 0000 No error
0x31 0001 Error in the 0th bit
0x32 0010 Error in the 1st bit
0x33 0011 Errors in the 1st and 0th bits
0x34 0100 Error in the 2nd bit
0x35 0101 Errors in the 2nd and 0th bits
0x36 0110 Errors in the 2nd and 1st bits
0x37 0111 Errors in the 2nd, 1st, and 0th bits
0x38 1000 Error in the 3rd bit
0x39 1001 Errors in the 3rd and 0th bits
0x3a 1010 Errors in the 3rd and 1st bits
0x3b 1011 Errors in the 3rd, 1st, and 0th bits
0x3c 1100 Errors in the 3rd and 2nd bits
0x3d 1101 Errors in the 3rd, 2nd, and 0th bits
0x3e 1110 Errors in the 3rd, 2nd, and 1st bits
0x3f 1111 Errors in the 3rd, 2nd, 1st, and 0th bits

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
68
(2) Contents of each of the errors corresponding to the error message numbers are
described in table 6.1.4.2-2.

Table 6.1.4.2-2 Contents of errors indicated by error messages


(When the serial number is "S/N B*****")

Error
Error in the 3rd bit Error in the 2nd bit Error in the 1st bit Error in the 0th bit
No.
1 4: Abnormal main 3: Abnormal PN power 2: Overvoltage error 1: Overcurrent error
power supply input supply
2 8: Servo amplifier 7: Abnormal hardware 6: Abnormal 0: Not defined
overheating in the servo hardware in the
amplifier servo amplifier
3 12: Abnormal 0: Not defined 10: Abnormal 9: Excessive heating
hardware in the feedback resistor of the feedback
servo amplifier resistor
4 33: Abnormal 32: Abnormal 30: Abnormal 31: Abnormal
hardware in the hardware in the hardware in the hardware in the
servo amplifier servo amplifier servo amplifier servo amplifier
5 16: Speed amplifier 15: Overcurrent error 14: During braking 13: Abnormal
saturation hardware in the
servo amplifier
6 20: Over speed 19: Abnormal 18: Short-time 17: Heated motor
hardware in the overload
servo amplifier
7 24: Abnormal 23: Abnormal 22: Abnormal 21: Abnormal
hardware in the hardware in the hardware in the deviation counter
servo amplifier servo amplifier servo amplifier
8 0: Not defined 27: Abnormal 26: Abnormal 25: Abnormal
hardware in the hardware in the hardware in the
servo amplifier servo amplifier servo amplifier
9 43: Abnormal 42: Abnormal 41: Abnormal 40: Encoder
hardware in the hardware in the hardware in the disconnection
servo amplifier servo amplifier servo amplifier error
10 41: Abnormal 46: Abnormal 45: Abnormal 44: Abnormal
hardware in the hardware in the hardware in the hardware in the
servo amplifier servo amplifier servo amplifier servo amplifier
11 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 47: Abnormal 48: Abnormal
hardware in the hardware in the
servo amplifier servo amplifier
12 48: Abnormal 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 0: Not defined
hardware in the
servo amplifier
13 Speed error Overshooting Z phase (sensor) not Abnormal positioning
being input
14 901, 902, 909: 910 to 916, 918, 924, Abnormal hardware in 0: Not defined
Abnormal hardware in 925: Abnormal the servo amplifier (no
the servo amplifier hardware in the servo number)
amplifier
15 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 49: Abnormal
encoder sensor
phase
16 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 0: Not defined

(3) The number preceding the contents of each error in table 6.1.4.2-2 is the error
code displayed on the LED of the servo amplifier. (Errors with no numbers can be
checked by the KGTSM PWB only.) For the method for displaying the error codes
and the history at the servo amplifier, refer to subsection 7.5 of this manual.

Î Refer to subsection 7.5.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
69
(4) The meanings of the errors described in table 6.1.4.2-2 are described in table
6.1.4.2-3. For details, refer to subsection 7.6.2.3 of this manual.

Î Refer to subsection 7.6.2.3.

Table 6.1.4.2-3 Meanings of the error contents

Contents of error Meaning


Abnormal hardware in the servo This bit set to 1 indicates that the circuit in the servo amplifier
amplifier malfunctions.
Abnormal main power supply Voltage drop in the servo main power supply (200 VAC)
input (AL. 4)
Abnormal PN power supply Drop of the input line voltage or insufficient line capacity
(AL. 3)
Overvoltage error (AL. 2) High input voltage, excessive load inertia
Overcurrent error (AL. 1) IPM malfunction, shorted motor cable, ground fault, ambient
temperature of more than 55°C
Abnormal feedback resistor Disconnection of the feedback resistor
(AL. 10)
Excessive heating of the Abnormal feedback resistor mounted in the servo amplifier
feedback resistor (AL. 9)
Servo amplifier overheating Excessively high temperature of the heat radiation fins of the
(AL. 8) servo amplifier
Speed amplifier saturation Maximum current flowing in the motor for more than 3
(AL. 16) seconds, excessive load, low pulse accuracy
Overcurrent error (AL. 15) Motor current exceeding 120% of the current limit
During braking (AL. 14) Servo amplifier malfunction. (This system uses no brakes.)
Over speed (AL. 20) This error occurs if 120% of the maximum number of
rotations is exceeded.
Short-time overload (AL. 18) Rotation is locked.
Heated motor (AL. 17) Excessive load, excessively short acceleration/deceleration
interval
Abnormal deviation counter Abnormal servo amplifier, excessive load
(AL. 21)
Encoder disconnection error Disconnection of the encoder cable, malfunction of the
(AL. 40) encoder
Speed error Deceleration and stoppage if ±3% of the specified speed is
exceeded (the servo amplifier does not display this error)
Overshooting The current in the servo amplifier increases at the time of
stoppage (the servo amplifier does not display this error).
Z phase (sensor) not being input The position sensor signal is not input.
Abnormal positioning This error occurs if ±1° of the specified stop position is
exceeded.
Abnormal encoder sensor phase The phase of the position sensor signal is incorrect.
(AL. 49)

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
70
6.1.5 Terminal log

Up to 512 of the most recent messages (messages shown in the preceding subsection)
are stored in the memory within the KGTSM. The messages can be checked later
using the method outlined below:

<Work procedure>

(1) Connect CN404 of the KGTSM to the COM port of the PC using the service cable.

(2) Start the Hyper Terminal program on the PC.


(For the start-up procedures, refer to subsection 4.6 "Setting the Hyper Terminal"
of the installation manual (2C201-150E).)

(3) Input log [Enter] from the PC.

[GTS] log [Enter]

*** message log list ***


HH:MM:SS DISP: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
HH:MM:SS SLIDE: YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
:
:

20 messages are displayed in order starting from the oldest message.

*: HH:MM:SS indicates the time of registration.

(4) After a message is displayed, the following commands can be used:

command f:fwd b:bwd q:quit :


f: Next screen
b: Preceding screen
q: End terminal log

CAUTION: When checking the terminal log, do not turn the gantry power ON/OFF or
reset the KGTSM PWB. These actions will result in the memory being
cleared.

No. 2D201-063E*E
71
6.2 Detailed KGTSM Status Codes
(Including Error Codes and Interlock Information)
6.2.1 Details

This subsection describes how detailed status information for the KGTSM can be
obtained. The following information can be seen:

(1) Cyclic status data

(b1)(b2) : Running status of the KGTSM

(c) : DAS offset status

(d) : Operating status of the gantry

(e) : X-ray ON status


(X-ray ON signal sent from the KGTSM to the XC)

(f) : Couch status

(g) : OPCONTA status

(h1) to (h8) : Outline of errors


(indicating the function which caused the error)

(i) to (k) : Status of interlocks

(l1)(l2)(l3) : Rotation information of the gantry

(m1) to (m4) : Position information of the X-ray tube on the gantry

(n1) to (n6) : Position information of the couch top (horizontal)

(o1) to (o4) : Position information of the couch (vertical)

(p1) to (p4) : Tilt angle information of the gantry

(q) : MUDAT status

(r) : Idle status and projector ON/OFF status

(s) : Status of the OUT-2 sensor

(t) : Request status condition

(u) : Detailed status of COM-PRE (unused)

(v1) to (v8) : Sensor status

No. 2D201-063E*E
72
(2) List of return status (more detailed information)

(a) to (i) : Functional status of the inside of the rotation section of the gantry

(j) to (m) : Functional status of the stationary section of the gantry

(n1) to (n4) : Angular position information of the external light projector

(o1) to (o19) : Details of errors

(p1) to (p16) : Details of DD motor errors

(q1) to (q4) : Abnormal MUDAT channels

(r) to (z) : Scan conditions set by the system


(not explained in this section)

(A) : Gantry rotation speed data

(B) : Angular information from gantry tilt encoder

(C) : Couch horizontal movement speed data

(D) : Couch speed information for CT fluoroscopy

(E) : Information regarding initialization of the couch horizontal


movement absolute value

(F) : Couch horizontal movement absolute value

(G) : Couch horizontal movement BASE value

<Tools required>

1) PC

2) Service cables (GR-1, as standard)

3) Programs: Hyper Terminal etc.

<Procedure to collect status data>

1) Connect CN404 of the KGTSM to the COM port of the PC using the service cable.

2) Start the Hyper Terminal program on the PC.


(For the start-up procedures, refer to subsection 4.6 "Setting the Hyper Terminal" of
the installation manual (2C201-150E).)

3) Enter as follows on the PC.


When the status is to be displayed only once : sts [Enter]
When the status is to be displayed periodically : csts [Enter]*

*: If you want to stop periodical display, you have to input: sts [Enter].

No. 2D201-063E*E
73
6.2.2 Explanation of errors

(1) Error status data preceded by an asterisk


(Return status data o1 to o17)

For errors marked with (œ) in the error details list (o1 to o17 of the return status),
the corresponding functions cannot be executed after the error has occurred even
if attempts are made to retry execution. The errors are not released unless the
KGTSM is reset. Other errors are reset when requests for execution of the
corresponding functions are made again, and execution is attempted. If an error
recurs at this time, an error is set and sent to the SS/ADI.

(2) When an error that does not allow reexecution (error having a œ mark) occurs for
horizontal movement (o5), gantry tilting (o7), or vertical movement (o12), pressing
the operating panel switch will stop the operation and make the indicator flash.
When the system is not in the interlock status (lamp is lit) and the indicator flashes
with the switch pressed, check the contents of the error referring to the status
details shown below:

No. 2D201-063E*E
74
[GTS] *** dualport RAM cyclic status ***(cyclic status)

done_sts=5252(RR) off_sts=52(R) rote_sts=52(R) x_ray_sts=52(R) bed_sts=52(R)


↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(b1)(b2) (c) (d) (e) (f)
gns_sts=52(R) err sts=3032383a30303030(00000000) slid_inter=33(0)
↓ ↓ ↓
(g) (h1) to (h8) (i)
hite_inter=33(0) tilt_inter=32(0) r_spd=303030(000) x_ray_pos=30303030(0000)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(j) (k) (l1) to (l3) (m1) to (m4)
sld_dsp=2b3030303030(+00000) hite_dsp=2b353131(+000) tilt_dsp=2d333230(+000)
↓ ↓ ↓
(n1) to (n6) (o1) to (o4) (p1) to (p4)
mudat=40(@) free_lgt_sts=30(0) preheat_cut=31(0) req_sts=40(@)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(q) (r) (s) (t)
pre_err=40(@) sen_chk=30313c3e3f3f3030(00000000)
↓ ↓
(u) (v1) to (v8)
*** dualport RAM return status *** (return status)
weg_rst=30(0) das_rst=303030(222) slt_rst=303030(000) row_rst=3030(00)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(a) (b1) to (b3) (c1) to (c3) (d1) (d2)
x_focus=30(0) tc_offset=303030(000) btm_rst=303030(000) detector=303030(000)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(e) (f1) to (f3) (g1) to (g3) (h1) to (h3)
gt_rst=30(0) sld_sts=30(0) hite_sts=30(0) tilt_sts=30(0) lite_sts=30(0)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(i) (j) (k) (l) (m)
lgt_deg=2b363335(+000)

(n1) to (n4)
mes_beam=40(@) mes_slit=40(@) mes_mode=40(@) mes_wedge=40(@)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(o1) (o2) (o3) (o4)
mes_slide1=40(@) mes_rote=40(@) mes_tilt=40(@) mes_lite=40(@) mes_gns=40(@)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(o5) (o6) (o7) (o8) (o9)

No. 2D201-063E*E
75
mes_main=40(@) mes_das=40(@) mes_hite=40(@) mes_power=40(@) mes_mudat=40(@)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(o10) (o11) (o12) (o13) (o15)
mes_gns_count=40(@) mes_compre=40(@) mes_det=40(@) mes_slide2=40(@)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(o16) (o17) (o18) (o19)
dd_err=30303030303030303030303030303030(0000000000000000)

(p1) to (p16)
mudat_err=40404040(@@@@)

(q1) to (q4)
scan_type=30(0) view_rate=30303030(0000) x_ray_pos=313230(120)
↓ ↓ ↓
(r) (s1) to (s4) (t1) to (t3)
slide_mv_direct=30(0) slide_mv_value=3030303030(00000)
↓ ↓
(u) (v1) to (v5)
view_count=303030303030(000000) select puls=30(0)
↓ ↓
(w1) to (w6) (x)
helical speed=3030303030(00000) corrct=30(0)
↓ ↓
(y1) to (y5) (z)
speed data=0x0 tilt data=0x0 slide speed data=0x0
↓ ↓ ↓
(A) (B) (C)
fluoroscopy slide speed data=0x0

(D)
abs init=30(0) abs sld dsp=303030303030(000000) slide BASE=0
↓ ↓ ↓
(E) (F) (G)

No. 2D201-063E*E
76
(3) Cyclic status

(b1) (b2) running status

The table shows the KGTSM status for various commands:

(b1) (b2) Content


R R Ready
P B PAS Busy
D (X) PAS DONE [ID (X)]
S B SCAN Busy
S T SCAN Table moving
S D SCAN DONE
U B UNIT Busy
M (X) UNIT DONE [ID (X)]
A B ABORT Busy
A D ABORT DONE
B B BREAK Busy
B D BREAK DONE
E B END Busy
E D END DONE
H B HEAD Busy
N (X) HEAD DONE [ID (X)]
L B LOG Busy
L D LOG DONE

(c) DAS offset status

The following are the offset status of the DAS:


R: Offset data can be acquired. (Ready)
B: Offset data acquisition in progress (Busy)
D: Offset acquisition completed (DONE)
E: Offset acquisition error (ERROR)

(d) Operating status of the gantry

This data indicates the operating status of the gantry:


R: The gantry is ready to rotate. (Ready)
B: The gantry is rotating. (Busy)

(e) X-ray ON/OFF status

This data indicates the status of the X-ray ON signal:


R: X-ray OFF (Ready)
B: X-ray ON (Busy)
A: X-ray OFF that has occurred as a result of exposure abort (Abort)

No. 2D201-063E*E
77
(f) Couch status

This data indicates the status of the couch:


R: The couch is ready to move. (Ready)
B: The couch is in motion. (Busy)

(g) OPCONTA status

This data indicates the control status (OPCONTA) inside the gantry:
R: Ready for operation. (Ready)
B: Operation in progress. (Busy)

(h1) to (h8) Error status

These data indicate the error status:

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
(h1) 0 0 1 1 Beam trimmer Slit DAS mode Wedge
(h2) 0 0 1 1 Horizontal Gantry rotation Gantry tilting External light
movement of projector
couch 1
(h3) 0 0 1 1 OPCONTA Main DAS Vertical
movement of
couch
(h4) 0 0 1 1 GTS system (Cannot be MUDAT (Cannot be
used) used)
(h5) 0 0 1 1 (Cannot be Detector Horizontal (For future
used) switching movement of expansion)
couch 2
(h6) 0 0 1 1 (For future (For future (For future (For future
expansion) expansion) expansion) expansion)
(h7) 0 0 1 1 (For future (For future (For future (For future
expansion) expansion) expansion) expansion)
(h8) 0 0 1 1 (For future (For future (For future (For future
expansion) expansion) expansion) expansion)

When an error occurs, the corresponding bit


is set to "1".

(i) Couch slide interlock

This data indicates slide interlock information of the couch.

(i) IN direction OUT direction


0 Movement possible Movement possible
1 Movement disabled Movement possible
2 Movement possible Movement disabled
3 Movement disabled Movement disabled

No. 2D201-063E*E
78
(j) Vertical movement interlocks of the couch

This data indicates interlock information of the vertical movements of the


couch.

(j) UP direction DOWN direction


0 Movement possible Movement possible
1 Movement disabled Movement possible
2 Movement possible Movement disabled
3 Movement disabled Movement disabled

(k) Gantry tilting interlocks

This data indicates interlock information of the gantry tilt.

(k) + direction - direction


0 Tilt possible Tilt possible
1 Tilt disabled Tilt possible
2 Tilt possible Tilt disabled
3 Tilt disabled Tilt disabled

(l1) to (l3) Gantry rotation information

The following are gantry rotation status:

(l1) (l2) (l3) Gantry rotation status


0 0 0 Rotation stopped
B B B Rotating speed changing
0 0 1 Rotating at 60 s/rotation (constant speed)
0 3 0 Rotating at 2 s/rotation (constant speed)
0 4 0 Rotating at 1.5 s/rotation (constant speed)
0 6 0 Rotating at 1 s/rotation (constant speed)
0 8 0 Rotating at 0.75 s/rotation (constant speed)
1 0 0 Rotating at 0.6 s/rotation (constant speed)
1 2 0 Rotating at 0.5 s/rotation (constant speed)
1 5 0 Rotating at 0.4 s/rotation (constant speed)

No. 2D201-063E*E
79
(m1) to (m4) Tube position

The position of the tube in the gantry is indicated.

The gantry position pulse is expressed as a hexadecimal number after the


position detection sensor is turned OFF.

(m1) (m2) (m3) (m4)


Position pulse
1000's digit 100's digit 10's digit 1's digit

The position detection sensor is turned OFF at a tube angle of 120°.

(n1) to (n6) Position information of the couch top (horizontal)

(n1) Sliding position code

+ : Plus position (0 x 2B)


- : Minus position (0 x 2D)

(n2) to (n6) Sliding position (in millimeters)

(n2)(n3)(n4)(n5).(n6) mm

(o1) to (o4) Position information of the couch (vertical)

This data indicates the vertical position of the couch.

(o1) Couch height code

+: Plus position (0 x 2B)


- : Minus position (0 x 2D)

(o2) to (o4) Couch height (in millimeters)

(o2)(o3)(o4) mm

(p1) to (p4) Tilt angle information of the gantry

(p1) Gantry tilt +/- mark

+ : Plus position (0 x 2B)


- : Minus position (0 x 2D)

(p2) to (p4) Tilt indication digits

(p2)(p3).(p4)°

No. 2D201-063E*E
80
(q) MUDAT status

Indicates the MUDAT status.


8 bits from D7 to D0 are allocated as follows:

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
* For the above bits, 1 corresponds to the effective status.

D7: 0 fixed
D6: 1 fixed
D5: For future expansion
D4: For future expansion
D3: For future expansion
D2: For future expansion
D1: For future expansion
D0: For future expansion

(r) Couch FREE status and light projector status

(r) FREE status Projector status


0 OFF OFF
1 ON OFF
2 OFF ON
3 ON ON

(s) OUT-2 sensor status

0: The OUT-2 sensor is OFF.


1: The OUT-2 sensor is ON.

(t) Request status

This shows the status of control requests from KGTSM to SS/ADI.


The eight bits from D7 to D0 are allocated in the following manner:

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

* For the above bits, 1 corresponds to the effective status.

D7: Fixed to 0
D6: Fixed to 0
D5: Fixed to 1
D4: Fixed to 1
D3: Not in use (for future expansion)
D2: Not in use (for future expansion)
D1: Request flag for home position
D0: Flag for 0 clearance

(u) COM-PRE status details

No. 2D201-063E*E
81
(v1) to (v8) Sensor status

The status of each sensor on the KGTSM is indicated.

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
(v1) 0 0 1 1 Tape switch at Tape switch at Mat switch at Mat switch at the
the lower part of the lower part of the upper part upper part of the
the rear of the the front of the of the rear of front of the gantry
gantry gantry the gantry
(v2) 0 0 1 1 TILT +LIMIT TILT +Max. tilt TILT +0° TILT +Position
(v3) 0 0 1 1 TILT -LIMIT TILT -Max. tilt TILT -0° -
(v4) 0 0 1 1 HEIGHT-0.5 HEIGHT0 IN1 Position detection
sensor
(v5) 0 0 1 1 AUTO STOP HEIGHT2 HEIGHT1 UP LIMIT
(v6) 0 0 1 1 IN LIMIT OUT1 OUT LIMIT DOWN LIMIT
(v7) 0 0 1 1 (Unused) (Unused) (Unused) (Unused)
(v8) 0 0 1 1 (Unused) (Unused) (Unused) (Unused)

* In the above table, 1 corresponds to the sensor-ON setting.

(4) Return status

(a) Wedges

Setting value (a)


0 Undefined position
1 (Spare)
2 Small
3 Large
4 DR
5 (Spare)
; (0 x 3B) Busy
= (0 x 3D) Limit

(b1) to (b3) DAS mode

Indicates the DAS mode setting status.

Setting value (b1) Main (b2) Ref (b3) BMD


2 GAIN1 GAIN1 GAIN1
3 GAIN2 GAIN2 GAIN2
4 GAIN3 GAIN3 GAIN3
5 GAIN4 GAIN4 GAIN4
6 GAIN5 GAIN5 GAIN5
7 GAIN6 GAIN6 GAIN6
8 GAIN7 GAIN7 GAIN7
A (0 x 41) TP0 - -

No. 2D201-063E*E
82
(c1) to (c3): Scan slice thickness (slit)

Indicates the status of the scan slice thickness (slit) position.

(c1) (c2) (c3) Scan slice thickness (slit)


0 0 0 Position not identified
0 4 0 4 mm
0 3 0 3 mm
0 2 0 2 mm
0 1 0 1 mm
0 0 5 0.5 mm
S S S Reference position sensor

(d1)(d2): Number of rows

Indicates the status of the number of rows.

(d1) (d2) Number of rows


0 0 Position not identified
1 6 16 rows
1 4 14 rows
1 2 12 rows
1 0 10 rows
0 8 8 rows
0 6 6 rows
0 4 4 rows
0 2 2 rows

(e) X-ray tube focus size

Indicates the status of the X-ray tube focus size.

(e) X-ray tube focus size


0 Position not identified
S Small focus
L Large focus

(f1) to (f3): Tracking collimator offset

Indicates the status of the tracking collimator offset position.

(f1) (f2) (f3) Tracking collimator offset


0 0 0 Position not identified
+ or - 0 to 9 0 to 9 Offset amount ±XX

No. 2D201-063E*E
83
(g1) to (g3): Beam trimmer (unused)

Indicates the beam trimmer status.

(g1) (g2) (g3) Beam trimmer


0 0 0 Position not identified
1 0 0 10 mm
0 7 0 7 mm
0 5 0 5 mm
0 3 0 3 mm
0 2 0 2 mm
0 1 0 1 mm
0 0 8 0.8 mm
S S S Reference position sensor

(h1) to (h3): Detector switching

Indicates the detector switching status.

(h1) (h2) (h3) Detector switching


0 0 0 Position not identified
0 4 0 4 mm
0 3 0 3 mm
0 2 0 2 mm
0 1 0 1 mm
0 0 5 0.5 mm

(i) Light projector status

Indicates the lighting status of the projector.

(i) Internal light projector External light projector


0 OFF OFF
1 ON OFF
2 OFF ON
3 ON ON

(j) Horizontal movement status of the couch top

(k) Vertical movement status of the couch

(l) Tilt status of the gantry

No. 2D201-063E*E
84
(m) Tilt status of the external light projector

The following shows the operating status of each of the above:

Settings (j) (k) (l) (m)


Horizontal Vertical Gantry tilting External light
movement of movement of projector
couch top couch
0 (0 x 30) At halt At halt At halt At halt
; (0 x 3B) Movement in Movement in Movement in Movement in
progress progress progress progress

(n1) to (n4) External light projector tilt angle indication

(n1) Projector tilt +/- mark

+: Plus position (0 × 2B)


-: Minus position (0 × 2D)

(n2) to (n4) Tilt indication digits

(n2)(n3).(n4)°

(For errors marked with an asterisk, reexecution is not possible.


For other errors, operation is performed again when the corresponding
operating instruction is executed.)

(o1) Beam trimmer error details (Unused)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7: 0 fixed
D6: 1 fixed
D5: 0 fixed
D4: 0 fixed
D3: 0 fixed
D2: 0 fixed
D1: 0 fixed
D0: 0 fixed

(o2) Slit error details

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7: 0 fixed
D6: 1 fixed
D5: Not in use
D4: Not in use
D3: Pulse motor abnormal
D2: Software error
D1: Input parameter error
D0: Operating time-out

No. 2D201-063E*E
85
(o3) DAS mode error details

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7 : 0 fixed
D6 : 1 fixed
D5 to D2 : Not in use
D1 : Input parameter error
D0 : Operating time-out

(o4) Wedge error details

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7: 0 fixed
D6: 1 fixed
D5: Not in use
D4: Not in use
D3: Pulse motor abnormal
D2: Software error
D1: Input parameter error
D0: Operating time-out

(o5) Couch top horizontal movement 1 error details

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7: 0 fixed
D6: 1 fixed
D5: Overrun/servo-amplifier abnormal/reverse-direction movement
(10 mm or more) œ
D4: Stop position error
D3: Watchdog error œ
D2: Operating time-out œ
D1: Data error
(specified movement range and autoslide values abnormal)
D0: Interlock terminated

(o6) Gantry rotation error details

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7: 0 fixed
D6: 1 fixed
D5: Gantry stop position error
D4: Gantry speed error
D3: DD motor abnormal œ
D2: Position pulse time-out
D1: DD motor communication error œ
D0: Other errors

No. 2D201-063E*E
86
(o7) Gantry tilting error details

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7: 0 fixed
D6: 1 fixed
D5: Reverse movement (2° or more)/indicator angle data abnormal œ
D4: Limit error
D3: Watchdog error œ
D2: Tilt movement time-out/encoder time-out œ
D1: Data error (specified tilt angle error)
D0: Interlocks interrupted

(o8) Light projector

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7 : 0 fixed
D6 : 1 fixed
D5 to D0 : Not in use

(o9) OPCONTA error details

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7: 0 fixed
D6: 1 fixed
D5: Communication error
D4: Software error
D3: Operation abnormal
(Refer to the wedge, slit, beam trimmer errors for details.)
D2: Communication time-out
D1: NAK received
D0: The specified number of communication retries exceeded

(o10) Details of main errors

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7: 0 fixed
D6: 1 fixed
D5: Abnormal CT fluoroscopy safety circuit
D4: Command error
D3: Dual port RAM error œ
D2: Hardware timer check error (checked at the time of starting) œ
D1: Message queue error (software error) œ
D0: System starting error (software error) œ

No. 2D201-063E*E
87
(o11) DAS error details

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7: 0 fixed
D6: 1 fixed
D5: X-ray system error (X-RAY ON status continues even after X-ray
generation is terminated.)
D4: Gantry rotation system error
D3: Initialization error (DAS CCP)
D2: Time-out
D1: DAS CCP interrupt abnormal
D0: Software error or interruption of operation due to interlock activation

(o12) Couch vertical movement error details

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7: 0 fixed
D6: 1 fixed
D5: Reverse movement (10 mm or more) œ
D4: Not in use
D3: Watchdog error œ
D2: Vertical movement time-out œ
D1: Data error (Error in specified movement range)
D0: Interlocks interrupted

(o13) GTS system error details

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7: 0 fixed
D6: 1 fixed
D5: Not in use
D4: 100 V/200 V OFF
D3: SS/ADI hang-up
D2: Not in use
D1: Not in use
D0: Not in use

(o15) MUDAT error details

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7: 0 fixed
D6: 1 fixed
D5: Not in use
D4: Not in use
D3: Abnormal number of data sets in 1 view
D2: Channel switching error
D1: Data cannot be transferred from the stationary section to the rotation
section. (SOTROT FAIL) *
D0: Data cannot be transferred from the rotation section to the stationary
section. (ROTSOT FAIL) *

* When error reset is requested by the system, release the error.

No. 2D201-063E*E
88
(o17) COM-PRE error details (unused)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7: 0 fixed
D6: 1 fixed
D5: 0 fixed
D4: 0 fixed
D3: 0 fixed
D2: 0 fixed
D1: 0 fixed *
D0: 0 fixed

* This will be generated when a metallic object is present or when X-ray


generation is stopped during scanning.

(o18) Detector switching error details

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7: 0 fixed
D6: 1 fixed
D5: Not in use
D4: Not in use
D3: Not in use
D2: Not in use
D1: Input parameter error
D0: Not in use

(o19): Couch horizontal movement 2 error details

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7: 0 fixed
D6: 1 fixed
D5: Not in use
D4: Not in use
D3: Not in use
D2: Overrun œ
D1: Servo amplifier abnormality œ
D0: Movement in the opposite direction œ

No. 2D201-063E*E
89
(p1) to (p16): Details of DD motor errors (for serial number "S/N Axxxxx")

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
(p1) 0 0 1 1 4: Abnormal 3: Abnormal PN 2: Overvoltage 1: Overcurrent
hardware in the power supply
servo amplifier
(p2) 0 0 1 1 8: Abnormal 7: Abnormal 6: Abnormal 5: Abnormal
hardware in the hardware in the hardware in the hardware in the
servo amplifier servo amplifier servo amplifier servo amplifier
(p3) 0 0 1 1 12: Abnormal 11: Abnormal 10: Feedback 9: Feedback
hardware in the hardware in the resistor resistor
servo amplifier servo amplifier abnormality overheating
(p4) 0 0 1 1 33: Abnormal 32: Abnormal 30: Current value 31: Command value
hardware in the hardware in the counter overflow counter overflow
servo amplifier servo amplifier
(p5) 0 0 1 1 16: Speed amplifier 15: Overcurrent 14: Brake engaged 13: Abnormal
saturation hardware in the
servo amplifier
(p6) 0 0 1 1 20: Over speed 19: Abnormal 18: Short-term 17: Motor
hardware in the overload overheating
servo amplifier
(p7) 0 0 1 1 24: Abnormal 23: Abnormal 22: Abnormal 21: Abnormal
hardware in the hardware in the hardware in the deviation
servo amplifier servo amplifier servo amplifier counter
(p8) 0 0 1 1 0: Not defined 27: Abnormal 26: Abnormal 25: Abnormal
hardware in the parameter hardware in the
servo amplifier servo amplifier
(p9) 0 0 1 1 43: Abnormal 42: Abnormal 41: Abnormal 40: Encoder
hardware in the hardware in the hardware in the disconnection
servo amplifier servo amplifier servo amplifier error
(p10) 0 0 1 1 41: Abnormal 46: Abnormal 45: Abnormal 44: Abnormal
hardware in the hardware in the hardware in the hardware in the
servo amplifier servo amplifier servo amplifier servo amplifier
(p11) 0 0 1 1 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 47: Abnormal 48: Encoder setting
hardware in the error
servo amplifier
(p12) 0 0 1 1 48: Abnormal 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 0: Not defined
encoder
initialization
(p13) 0 0 1 1 Speed error Abnormal overshoot Z phase (sensor) not Positioning error
entered
(p14) 0 0 1 1 901, 902, 909: 910 to 916, 918, 924, Abnormal hardware 0: Not defined
Abnormal 925: in the servo amplifier
hardware in the Abnormal (no number)
servo amplifier hardware in the
servo amplifier
(p15) 0 0 1 1 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 0: Not defined
(p16) 0 0 1 1 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 0: Not defined

1 corresponds to the error status.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
90
(p1) to (p16): Details of DD motor errors (for serial number "S/N Bxxxxx")

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
(p1) 0 0 1 1 4: Abnormal main 3: Abnormal PN 2: Overvoltage 1: Overcurrent
power supply power supply error error
input
(p2) 0 0 1 1 8: Servo amplifier 7: Abnormal 6: Abnormal 0: Not defined
overheating hardware in the hardware in the
servo amplifier servo amplifier
(p3) 0 0 1 1 12: Abnormal 0: Not defined 10: Abnormal 9: Excessive
hardware in feedback heating of the
the servo resistor feedback
amplifier resistor
(p4) 0 0 1 1 33: Abnormal 32: Abnormal 30: Abnormal 31: Abnormal
hardware in hardware in hardware in hardware in
the servo the servo the servo the servo
amplifier amplifier amplifier amplifier
(p5) 0 0 1 1 16: Speed 15: Overcurrent 14: During 13: Abnormal
amplifier error braking hardware in
saturation the servo
amplifier
(p6) 0 0 1 1 20: Over speed 19: Abnormal 18: Short-time 17: Heated motor
hardware in overload
the servo
amplifier
(p7) 0 0 1 1 24: Abnormal 23: Abnormal 22: Abnormal 21: Abnormal
hardware in hardware in hardware in deviation
the servo the servo the servo counter
amplifier amplifier amplifier
(p8) 0 0 1 1 0: Not defined 27: Abnormal 26: Abnormal 25: Abnormal
hardware in hardware in hardware in
the servo the servo the servo
amplifier amplifier amplifier
(p9) 0 0 1 1 43: Abnormal 42: Abnormal 41: Abnormal 40: Encoder
hardware in hardware in hardware in disconnection
the servo the servo the servo error
amplifier amplifier amplifier
(p10) 0 0 1 1 41: Abnormal 46: Abnormal 45: Abnormal 44: Abnormal
hardware in hardware in hardware in hardware in
the servo the servo the servo the servo
amplifier amplifier amplifier amplifier
(p11) 0 0 1 1 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 47: Abnormal 48: Abnormal
hardware in hardware in
the servo the servo
amplifier amplifier
(p12) 0 0 1 1 48: Abnormal 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 0: Not defined
hardware in
the servo
amplifier
(p13) 0 0 1 1 Speed error Overshooting Z phase (sensor) Abnormal
not being input positioning
(p14) 0 0 1 1 901, 902, 909: 910 to 916, 918, Abnormal hardware 0: Not defined
Abnormal hardware 924, 925: in the servo
in the servo Abnormal hardware amplifier (no
amplifier in the servo number)
amplifier
(p15) 0 0 1 1 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 49: Abnormal
encoder
sensor phase
(p16) 0 0 1 1 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 0: Not defined 0: Not defined

1 corresponds to the error status.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
91
(q1) to (q4): Abnormal MUDAT channels

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
(q1) 0 1 Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
(q2) 0 1 Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
(q3) 0 1 Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
(q4) 0 1 Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined

(r) to (z) Scan parameters given by the system

(A) Gantry rotation speed data

The gantry rotation speed data is shown in hexadecimal numbers.

(B) Gantry tilt encoder angle information

The encoder value for the gantry tilt (current value of the angle) is expressed
in hexadecimal numbers. The relationship between the encoder values and
the actual angles is shown in table 6.2-1.

(C) Couch horizontal movement speed data

The couch horizontal movement speed data is expressed in hexadecimal


numbers.

(D) Couch speed information for CT fluoroscopy (not in use)

(E) Information regarding initialization of the couch horizontal movement absolute


value

(F) Couch horizontal movement absolute value

(G) Couch horizontal movement BASE value

No. 2D201-063E*E
92
Table 6.2-1 Relationship between tilt encoder value and actual angle (1/9)

Display Encoder Display Encoder Display Encoder Display Encoder


angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG)
(DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX)
005 -31.6875 to -31.7500 025 -29.6875 to -29.7500
006 -31.6250 to -31.6875 026 -29.6250 to -29.6875
007 -31.5625 to -31.6250 027 -29.5625 to -29.6250
-31.5 008 -31.5000 to -31.5625 -29.5 028 -29.5000 to -29.5625
009 -31.4375 to -31.5000 029 -29.4375 to -29.5000
00A -31.3750 to -31.4375 02A -29.3750 to -29.4375
00B -31.3125 to -31.3750 02B -29.3125 to -29.3750
00C -31.2500 to -31.3125 02C -29.2500 to -29.3125
00D -31.1875 to -31.2500 02D -29.1875 to -29.2500
00E -31.1250 to -31.1875 02E -29.1250 to -29.1875
00F -31.0625 to -31.1250 02F -29.0625 to -29.1250
-31.0 010 -31.0000 to -31.0625 -29.0 030 -29.0000 to -29.0625
011 -30.9375 to -31.0000 031 -28.9375 to -29.0000
012 -30.8750 to -30.9375 032 -28.8750 to -28.9375
013 -30.8125 to -30.8750 033 -28.8125 to -28.8750
014 -30.7500 to -30.8125 034 -28.7500 to -28.8125
015 -30.6875 to -30.7500 035 -28.6875 to -28.7500
016 -30.6250 to -30.6875 036 -28.6250 to -28.6875
017 -30.5625 to -30.6250 037 -28.5625 to -28.6250
-30.5 018 -30.5000 to -30.5625 -28.5 038 -28.5000 to -28.5625
019 -30.4375 to -30.5000 039 -28.4375 to -28.5000
01A -30.3750 to -30.4375 03A -28.3750 to -28.4375
01B -30.3125 to -30.3750 03B -28.3125 to -28.3750
01C -30.2500 to -30.3125 03C -28.2500 to -28.3125
01D -30.1875 to -30.2500 03D -28.1875 to -28.2500
01E -30.1250 to -30.1875 03E -28.1250 to -28.1875
01F -30.0625 to -30.1250 03F -28.0625 to -28.1250
-32.0 000 -32.0000 to -32.0625 -30.0 020 -30.0000 to -30.0625 -28.0 040 -28.0000 to -28.0625
001 -31.9375 to -32.0000 021 -29.9375 to -30.0000 041 -27.9375 to -28.0000
002 -31.8750 to -31.9375 022 -29.8750 to -29.9375 042 -27.8750 to -27.9375
003 -31.8125 to -31.8750 023 -29.8125 to -29.8750 043 -27.8125 to -27.8750
004 -31.7500 to -31.8125 024 -29.7500 to -29.8125 044 -27.7500 to -27.8125

No. 2D201-063E*E
93
Table 6.2-1 Relationship between tilt encoder value and actual angle (2/9)

Display Encoder Display Encoder Display Encoder Display Encoder


angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG)
(DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX)
045 -27.6875 to -27.7500 065 -25.6875 to -25.7500 085 -23.6875 to -23.7500 0A5 -21.6875 to -21.7500
046 -27.6250 to -27.6875 066 -25.6250 to -25.6875 086 -23.6250 to -23.6875 0A6 -21.6250 to -21.6875
047 -27.5625 to -27.6250 067 -25.5625 to -25.6250 087 -23.5625 to -23.6250 0A7 -21.5625 to -21.6250
-27.5 048 -27.5000 to -27.5625 -25.5 068 -25.5000 to -25.5625 -23.5 088 -23.5000 to -23.5625 -21.5 0A8 -21.5000 to -21.5625
049 -27.4375 to -27.5000 069 -25.4375 to -25.5000 089 -23.4375 to -23.5000 0A9 -21.4375 to -21.5000
04A -27.3750 to -27.4375 06A -25.3750 to -25.4375 08A -23.3750 to -23.4375 0AA -21.3750 to -21.4375
04B -27.3125 to -27.3750 06B -25.3125 to -25.3750 08B -23.3125 to -23.3750 0AB -21.3125 to -21.3750
04C -27.2500 to -27.3125 06C -25.2500 to -25.3125 08C -23.2500 to -23.3125 0AC -21.2500 to -21.3125
04D -27.1875 to -27.2500 06D -25.1875 to -25.2500 08D -23.1875 to -23.2500 0AD -21.1875 to -21.2500
04E -27.1250 to -27.1875 06E -25.1250 to -25.1875 08E -23.1250 to -23.1875 0AE -21.1250 to -21.1875
04F -27.0625 to -27.1250 06F -25.0625 to -25.1250 08F -23.0625 to -23.1250 0AF -21.0625 to -21.1250
-27.0 050 -27.0000 to -27.0625 -25.0 070 -25.0000 to -25.0625 -23.0 090 -23.0000 to -23.0625 -21.0 0B0 -21.0000 to -21.0625
051 -26.9375 to -27.0000 071 -24.9375 to -25.0000 091 -22.9375 to -23.0000 0B1 -20.9375 to -21.0000
052 -26.8750 to -26.9375 072 -24.8750 to -24.9375 092 -22.8750 to -22.9375 0B2 -20.8750 to -20.9375
053 -26.8125 to -26.8750 073 -24.8125 to -24.8750 093 -22.8125 to -22.8750 0B3 -20.8125 to -20.8750
054 -26.7500 to -26.8125 074 -24.7500 to -24.8125 094 -22.7500 to -22.8125 0B4 -20.7500 to -20.8125
055 -26.6875 to -26.7500 075 -24.6875 to -24.7500 095 -22.6875 to -22.7500 0B5 -20.6875 to -20.7500
056 -26.6250 to -26.6875 076 -24.6250 to -24.6875 096 -22.6250 to -22.6875 0B6 -20.6250 to -20.6875
057 -26.5625 to -26.6250 077 -24.5625 to -24.6250 097 -22.5625 to -22.6250 0B7 -20.5625 to -20.6250
-26.5 058 -26.5000 to -26.5625 -24.5 078 -24.5000 to -24.5625 -22.5 098 -22.5000 to -22.5625 -20.5 0B8 -20.5000 to -20.5625
059 -26.4375 to -26.5000 079 -24.4375 to -24.5000 099 -22.4375 to -22.5000 0B9 -20.4375 to -20.5000
05A -26.3750 to -26.4375 07A -24.3750 to -24.4375 09A -22.3750 to -22.4375 0BA -20.3750 to -20.4375
05B -26.3125 to -26.3750 07B -24.3125 to -24.3750 09B -22.3125 to -22.3750 0BB -20.3125 to -20.3750
05C -26.2500 to -26.3125 07C -24.2500 to -24.3125 09C -22.2500 to -22.3125 0BC -20.2500 to -20.3125
05D -26.1875 to -26.2500 07D -24.1875 to -24.2500 09D -22.1875 to -22.2500 0BD -20.1875 to -20.2500
05E -26.1250 to -26.1875 07E -24.1250 to -24.1875 09E -22.1250 to -22.1875 0BE -20.1250 to -20.1875
05F -26.0625 to -26.1250 07F -24.0625 to -24.1250 09F -22.0625 to -22.1250 0BF -20.0625 to -20.1250
-26.0 060 -26.0000 to -26.0625 -24.0 080 -24.0000 to -24.0625 -22.0 0A0 -22.0000 to -22.0625 -20.0 0C0 -20.0000 to -20.0625
061 -25.9375 to -26.0000 081 -23.9375 to -24.0000 0A1 -21.9375 to -22.0000 0C1 -19.9375 to -20.0000
062 -25.8750 to -25.9375 082 -23.8750 to -23.9375 0A2 -21.8750 to -21.9375 0C2 -19.8750 to -19.9375
063 -25.8125 to -25.8750 083 -23.8125 to -23.8750 0A3 -21.8125 to -21.8750 0C3 -19.8125 to -19.8750
064 -25.7500 to -25.8125 084 -23.7500 to -23.8125 0A4 -21.7500 to -21.8125 0C4 -19.7500 to -19.8125

No. 2D201-063E*E
94
Table 6.2-1 Relationship between tilt encoder value and actual angle (3/9)

Display Encoder Display Encoder Display Encoder Display Encoder


angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG)
(DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX)
0C5 -19.6875 to -19.7500 0E5 -17.6875 to -17.7500 105 -15.6875 to -15.7500 125 -13.6875 to -13.7500
0C6 -19.6250 to -19.6875 0E6 -17.6250 to -17.6875 106 -15.6250 to -15.6875 126 -13.6250 to -13.6875
0C7 -19.5625 to -19.6250 0E7 -17.5625 to -17.6250 107 -15.5625 to -15.6250 127 -13.5625 to -13.6250
-19.5 0C8 -19.5000 to -19.5625 -17.5 0E8 -17.5000 to -17.5625 -15.5 108 -15.5000 to -15.5625 -13.5 128 -13.5000 to -13.5625
0C9 -19.4375 to -19.5000 0E9 -17.4375 to -17.5000 109 -15.4375 to -15.5000 129 -13.4375 to -13.5000
0CA -19.3750 to -19.4375 0EA -17.3750 to -17.4375 10A -15.3750 to -15.4375 12A -13.3750 to -13.4375
0CB -19.3125 to -19.3750 0EB -17.3125 to -17.3750 10B -15.3125 to -15.3750 12B -13.3125 to -13.3750
0CC -19.2500 to -19.3125 0EC -17.2500 to -17.3125 10C -15.2500 to -15.3125 12C -13.2500 to -13.3125
0CD -19.1875 to -19.2500 0ED -17.1875 to -17.2500 10D -15.1875 to -15.2500 12D -13.1875 to -13.2500
0CE -19.1250 to -19.1875 0EE -17.1250 to -17.1875 10E -15.1250 to -15.1875 12E -13.1250 to -13.1875
0CF -19.0625 to -19.1250 0EF -17.0625 to -17.1250 10F -15.0625 to -15.1250 12F -13.0625 to -13.1250
-19.0 0D0 -19.0000 to -19.0625 -17.0 0F0 -17.0000 to -17.0625 -15.0 110 -15.0000 to -15.0625 -13.0 130 -13.0000 to -13.0625
0D1 -18.9375 to -19.0000 0F1 -16.9375 to -17.0000 111 -14.9375 to -15.0000 131 -12.9375 to -13.0000
0D2 -18.8750 to -18.9375 0F2 -16.8750 to -16.9375 112 -14.8750 to -14.9375 132 -12.8750 to -12.9375
0D3 -18.8125 to -18.8750 0F3 -16.8125 to -16.8750 113 -14.8125 to -14.8750 133 -12.8125 to -12.8750
0D4 -18.7500 to -18.8125 0F4 -16.7500 to -16.8125 114 -14.7500 to -14.8125 134 -12.7500 to -12.8125
0D5 -18.6875 to -18.7500 0F5 -16.6875 to -16.7500 115 -14.6875 to -14.7500 135 -12.6875 to -12.7500
0D6 -18.6250 to -18.6875 0F6 -16.6250 to -16.6875 116 -14.6250 to -14.6875 136 -12.6250 to -12.6875
0D7 -18.5625 to -18.6250 0F7 -16.5625 to -16.6250 117 -14.5625 to -14.6250 137 -12.5625 to -12.6250
-18.5 0D8 -18.5000 to -18.5625 -16.5 0F8 -16.5000 to -16.5625 -14.5 118 -14.5000 to -14.5625 -12.5 138 -12.5000 to -12.5625
0D9 -18.4375 to -18.5000 0F9 -16.4375 to -16.5000 119 -14.4375 to -14.5000 139 -12.4375 to -12.5000
0DA -18.3750 to -18.4375 0FA -16.3750 to -16.4375 11A -14.3750 to -14.4375 13A -12.3750 to -12.4375
0DB -18.3125 to -18.3750 0FB -16.3125 to -16.3750 11B -14.3125 to -14.3750 13B -12.3125 to -12.3750
0DC -18.2500 to -18.3125 0FC -16.2500 to -16.3125 11C -14.2500 to -14.3125 13C -12.2500 to -12.3125
0DD -18.1875 to -18.2500 0FD -16.1875 to -16.2500 11D -14.1875 to -14.2500 13D -12.1875 to -12.2500
0DE -18.1250 to -18.1875 0FE -16.1250 to -16.1875 11E -14.1250 to -14.1875 13E -12.1250 to -12.1875
0DF -18.0625 to -18.1250 0FF -16.0625 to -16.1250 11F -14.0625 to -14.1250 13F -12.0625 to -12.1250
-18.0 0E0 -18.0000 to -18.0625 -16.0 100 -16.0000 to -16.0625 -14.0 120 -14.0000 to -14.0625 -12.0 140 -12.0000 to -12.0625
0E1 -17.9375 to -18.0000 101 -15.9375 to -16.0000 121 -13.9375 to -14.0000 141 -11.9375 to -12.0000
0E2 -17.8750 to -17.9375 102 -15.8750 to -15.9375 122 -13.8750 to -13.9375 142 -11.8750 to -11.9375
0E3 -17.8125 to -17.8750 103 -15.8125 to -15.8750 123 -13.8125 to -13.8750 143 -11.8125 to -11.8750
0E4 -17.7500 to -17.8125 104 -15.7500 to -15.8125 124 -13.7500 to -13.8125 144 -11.7500 to -11.8125

No. 2D201-063E*E
95
Table 6.2-1 Relationship between tilt encoder value and actual angle (4/9)

Display Encoder Display Encoder Display Encoder Display Encoder


angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG)
(DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX)
145 -11.6875 to -11.7500 165 -9.6875 to -9.7500 185 -7.6875 to -7.7500 1A5 -5.6875 to -5.7500
146 -11.6250 to -11.6875 166 -9.6250 to -9.6875 186 -7.6250 to -7.6875 1A6 -5.6250 to -5.6875
147 -11.5625 to -11.6250 167 -9.5625 to -9.6250 187 -7.5625 to -7.6250 1A7 -5.5625 to -5.6250
-11.5 148 -11.5000 to -11.5625 -9.5 168 -9.5000 to -9.5625 -7.5 188 -7.5000 to -7.5625 -5.5 1A8 -5.5000 to -5.5625
149 -11.4375 to -11.5000 169 -9.4375 to -9.5000 189 -7.4375 to -7.5000 1A9 -5.4375 to -5.5000
14A -11.3750 to -11.4375 16A -9.3750 to -9.4375 18A -7.3750 to -7.4375 1AA -5.3750 to -5.4375
14B -11.3125 to -11.3750 16B -9.3125 to -9.3750 18B -7.3125 to -7.3750 1AB -5.3125 to -5.3750
14C -11.2500 to -11.3125 16C -9.2500 to -9.3125 18C -7.2500 to -7.3125 1AC -5.2500 to -5.3125
14D -11.1875 to -11.2500 16D -9.1875 to -9.2500 18D -7.1875 to -7.2500 1AD -5.1875 to -5.2500
14E -11.1250 to -11.1875 16E -9.1250 to -9.1875 18E -7.1250 to -7.1875 1AE -5.1250 to -5.1875
14F -11.0625 to -11.1250 16F -9.0625 to -9.1250 18F -7.0625 to -7.1250 1AF -5.0625 to -5.1250
-11.0 150 -11.0000 to -11.0625 -9.0 170 -9.0000 to -9.0625 -7.0 190 -7.0000 to -7.0625 -5.0 1B0 -5.0000 to -5.0625
151 -10.9375 to -11.0000 171 -8.9375 to -9.0000 191 -6.9375 to -7.0000 1B1 -4.9375 to -5.0000
152 -10.8750 to -10.9375 172 -8.8750 to -8.9375 192 -6.8750 to -6.9375 1B2 -4.8750 to -4.9375
153 -10.8125 to -10.8750 173 -8.8125 to -8.8750 193 -6.8125 to -6.8750 1B3 -4.8125 to -4.8750
154 -10.7500 to -10.8125 174 -8.7500 to -8.8125 194 -6.7500 to -6.8125 1B4 -4.7500 to -4.8125
155 -10.6875 to -10.7500 175 -8.6875 to -8.7500 195 -6.6875 to -6.7500 1B5 -4.6875 to -4.7500
156 -10.6250 to -10.6875 176 -8.6250 to -8.6875 196 -6.6250 to -6.6875 1B6 -4.6250 to -4.6875
157 -10.5625 to -10.6250 177 -8.5625 to -8.6250 197 -6.5625 to -6.6250 1B7 -4.5625 to -4.6250
-10.5 158 -10.5000 to -10.5625 -8.5 178 -8.5000 to -8.5625 -6.5 198 -6.5000 to -6.5625 -4.5 1B8 -4.5000 to -4.5625
159 -10.4375 to -10.5000 179 -8.4375 to -8.5000 199 -6.4375 to -6.5000 1B9 -4.4375 to -4.5000
15A -10.3750 to -10.4375 17A -8.3750 to -8.4375 19A -6.3750 to -6.4375 1BA -4.3750 to -4.4375
15B -10.3125 to -10.3750 17B -8.3125 to -8.3750 19B -6.3125 to -6.3750 1BB -4.3125 to -4.3750
15C -10.2500 to -10.3125 17C -8.2500 to -8.3125 19C -6.2500 to -6.3125 1BC -4.2500 to -4.3125
15D -10.1875 to -10.2500 17D -8.1875 to -8.2500 19D -6.1875 to -6.2500 1BD -4.1875 to -4.2500
15E -10.1250 to -10.1875 17E -8.1250 to -8.1875 19E -6.1250 to -6.1875 1BE -4.1250 to -4.1875
15F -10.0625 to -10.1250 17F -8.0625 to -8.1250 19F -6.0625 to -6.1250 1BF -4.0625 to -4.1250
-10.0 160 -10.0000 to -10.0625 -8.0 180 -8.0000 to -8.0625 -6.0 1A0 -6.0000 to -6.0625 -4.0 1C0 -4.0000 to -4.0625
161 -9.9375 to -10.0000 181 -7.9375 to -8.0000 1A1 -5.9375 to -6.0000 1C1 -3.9375 to -4.0000
162 -9.8750 to -9.9375 182 -7.8750 to -7.9375 1A2 -5.8750 to -5.9375 1C2 -3.8750 to -3.9375
163 -9.8125 to -9.8750 183 -7.8125 to -7.8750 1A3 -5.8125 to -5.8750 1C3 -3.8125 to -3.8750
164 -9.7500 to -9.8125 184 -7.7500 to -7.8125 1A4 -5.7500 to -5.8125 1C4 -3.7500 to -3.8125

No. 2D201-063E*E
96
Table 6.2-1 Relationship between tilt encoder value and actual angle (5/9)

Display Encoder Display Encoder Display Encoder Display Encoder


angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG)
(DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX)
1C5 -3.6875 to -3.7500 1E5 -1.6875 to -1.7500 205 0.2500 to 0.3125 225 2.2500 to 2.3125
1C6 -3.6250 to -3.6875 1E6 -1.6250 to -1.6875 206 0.3125 to 0.3750 226 2.3125 to 2.3750
1C7 -3.5625 to -3.6250 1E7 -1.5625 to -1.6250 207 0.3750 to 0.4375 227 2.3750 to 2.4375
-3.5 1C8 -3.5000 to -3.5625 -1.5 1E8 -1.5000 to -1.5625 0.5 208 0.4375 to 0.5000 2.5 228 2.4375 to 2.5000
1C9 -3.4375 to -3.5000 1E9 -1.4375 to -1.5000 209 0.5000 to 0.5625 229 2.5000 to 2.5625
1CA -3.3750 to -3.4375 1EA -1.3750 to -1.4375 20A 0.5625 to 0.6250 22A 2.5625 to 2.6250
1CB -3.3125 to -3.3750 1EB -1.3125 to -1.3750 20B 0.6250 to 0.6875 22B 2.6250 to 2.6875
1CC -3.2500 to -3.3125 1EC -1.2500 to -1.3125 20C 0.6875 to 0.7500 22C 2.6875 to 2.7500
1CD -3.1875 to -3.2500 1ED -1.1875 to -1.2500 20D 0.7500 to 0.8125 22D 2.7500 to 2.8125
1CE -3.1250 to -3.1875 1EE -1.1250 to -1.1875 20E 0.8125 to 0.8750 22E 2.8125 to 2.8750
1CF -3.0625 to -3.1250 1EF -1.0625 to -1.1250 20F 0.8750 to 0.9375 22F 2.8750 to 2.9375
-3.0 1D0 -3.0000 to -3.0625 -1.0 1F0 -1.0000 to -1.0625 1.0 210 0.9375 to 1.0000 3.0 230 2.9375 to 3.0000
1D1 -2.9375 to -3.0000 1F1 -0.9375 to -1.0000 211 1.0000 to 1.0625 231 3.0000 to 3.0625
1D2 -2.8750 to -2.9375 1F2 -0.8750 to -0.9375 212 1.0625 to 1.1250 232 3.0625 to 3.1250
1D3 -2.8125 to -2.8750 1F3 -0.8125 to -0.8750 213 1.1250 to 1.1875 233 3.1250 to 3.1875
1D4 -2.7500 to -2.8125 1F4 -0.7500 to -0.8125 214 1.1875 to 1.2500 234 3.1875 to 3.2500
1D5 -2.6875 to -2.7500 1F5 -0.6875 to -0.7500 215 1.2500 to 1.3125 235 3.2500 to 3.3125
1D6 -2.6250 to -2.6875 1F6 -0.6250 to -0.6875 216 1.3125 to 1.3750 236 3.3125 to 3.3750
1D7 -2.5625 to -2.6250 1F7 -0.5625 to -0.6250 217 1.3750 to 1.4375 237 3.3750 to 3.4375
-2.5 1D8 -2.5000 to -2.5625 -0.5 1F8 -0.5000 to -0.5625 1.5 218 1.4375 to 1.5000 3.5 238 3.4375 to 3.5000
1D9 -2.4375 to -2.5000 1F9 -0.4375 to -0.5000 219 1.5000 to 1.5625 239 3.5000 to 3.5625
1DA -2.3750 to -2.4375 1FA -0.3750 to -0.4375 21A 1.5625 to 1.6250 23A 3.5625 to 3.6250
1DB -2.3125 to -2.3750 1FB -0.3125 to -0.3750 21B 1.6250 to 1.6875 23B 3.6250 to 3.6875
1DC -2.2500 to -2.3125 1FC -0.2500 to -0.3125 21C 1.6875 to 1.7500 23C 3.6875 to 3.7500
1DD -2.1875 to -2.2500 1FD -0.1875 to -0.2500 21D 1.7500 to 1.8125 23D 3.7500 to 3.8125
1DE -2.1250 to -2.1875 1FE -0.1250 to -0.1875 21E 1.8125 to 1.8750 23E 3.8125 to 3.8750
1DF -2.0625 to -2.1250 1FF -0.0625 to -0.1250 21F 1.8750 to 1.9375 23F 3.8750 to 3.9375
-2.0 1E0 -2.0000 to -2.0625 0 200 -0.0625 to 0 2.0 220 1.9375 to 2.0000 4.0 240 3.9375 to 4.0000
1E1 -1.9375 to -2.0000 201 0 to -0.0625 221 2.0000 to 2.0625 241 4.0000 to 4.0625
1E2 -1.8750 to -1.9375 202 0.0625 to 0.1250 222 2.0625 to 2.1250 242 4.0625 to 4.1250
1E3 -1.8125 to -1.8750 203 0.1250 to 0.1875 223 2.1250 to 2.1875 243 4.1250 to 4.1875
1E4 -1.7500 to -1.8125 204 0.1875 to 0.2500 224 2.1875 to 2.2500 244 4.1875 to 4.2500

No. 2D201-063E*E
97
Table 6.2-1 Relationship between tilt encoder value and actual angle (6/9)

Display Encoder Display Encoder Display Encoder Display Encoder


angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG)
(DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX)
245 4.2500 to 4.3125 265 6.2500 to 6.3125 285 8.2500 to 8.3125 2A5 10.2500 to 10.3125
246 4.3125 to 4.3750 266 6.3125 to 6.3750 286 8.3125 to 8.3750 2A6 10.3125 to 10.3750
247 4.3750 to 4.4375 267 6.3750 to 6.4375 287 8.3750 to 8.4375 2A7 10.3750 to 10.4375
4.5 248 4.4375 to 4.5000 6.5 268 6.4375 to 6.5000 8.5 288 8.4375 to 8.5000 10.5 2A8 10.4375 to 10.5000
249 4.5000 to 4.5625 269 6.5000 to 6.5625 289 8.5000 to 8.5625 2A9 10.5000 to 10.5625
24A 4.5625 to 4.6250 26A 6.5625 to 6.6250 28A 8.5625 to 8.6250 2AA 10.5625 to 10.6250
24B 4.6250 to 4.6875 26B 6.6250 to 6.6875 28B 8.6250 to 8.6875 2AB 10.6250 to 10.6875
24C 4.6875 to 4.7500 26C 6.6875 to 6.7500 28C 8.6875 to 8.7500 2AC 10.6875 to 10.7500
24D 4.7500 to 4.8125 26D 6.7500 to 6.8125 28D 8.7500 to 8.8125 2AD 10.7500 to 10.8125
24E 4.8125 to 4.8750 26E 6.8125 to 6.8750 28E 8.8125 to 8.8750 2AE 10.8125 to 10.8750
24F 4.8750 to 4.9375 26F 6.8750 to 6.9375 28F 8.8750 to 8.9375 2AF 10.8750 to 10.9375
5.0 250 4.9375 to 5.0000 7.0 270 6.9375 to 7.0000 9.0 290 8.9375 to 9.0000 11.0 2B0 10.9375 to 11.0000
251 5.0000 to 5.0625 271 7.0000 to 7.0625 291 9.0000 to 9.0625 2B1 11.0000 to 11.0625
252 5.0625 to 5.1250 272 7.0625 to 7.1250 292 9.0625 to 9.1250 2B2 11.0625 to 11.1250
253 5.1250 to 5.1875 273 7.1250 to 7.1875 293 9.1250 to 9.1875 2B3 11.1250 to 11.1875
254 5.1875 to 5.2500 274 7.1875 to 7.2500 294 9.1875 to 9.2500 2B4 11.1875 to 11.2500
255 5.2500 to 5.3125 275 7.2500 to 7.3125 295 9.2500 to 9.3125 2B5 11.2500 to 11.3125
256 5.3125 to 5.3750 276 7.3125 to 7.3750 296 9.3125 to 9.3750 2B6 11.3125 to 11.3750
257 5.3750 to 5.4375 277 7.3750 to 7.4375 297 9.3750 to 9.4375 2B7 11.3750 to 11.4375
5.5 258 5.4375 to 5.5000 7.5 278 7.4375 to 7.5000 9.5 298 9.4375 to 9.5000 11.5 2B8 11.4375 to 11.5000
259 5.5000 to 5.5625 279 7.5000 to 7.5625 299 9.5000 to 9.5625 2B9 11.5000 to 11.5625
25A 5.5625 to 5.6250 27A 7.5625 to 7.6250 29A 9.5625 to 9.6250 2BA 11.5625 to 11.6250
25B 5.6250 to 5.6875 27B 7.6250 to 7.6875 29B 9.6250 to 9.6875 2BB 11.6250 to 11.6875
25C 5.6875 to 5.7500 27C 7.6875 to 7.7500 29C 9.6875 to 9.7500 2BC 11.6875 to 11.7500
25D 5.7500 to 5.8125 27D 7.7500 to 7.8125 29D 9.7500 to 9.8125 2BD 11.7500 to 11.8125
25E 5.8125 to 5.8750 27E 7.8125 to 7.8750 29E 9.8125 to 9.8750 2BE 11.8125 to 11.8750
25F 5.8750 to 5.9375 27F 7.8750 to 7.9375 29F 9.8750 to 9.9375 2BF 11.8750 to 11.9375
6.0 260 5.9375 to 6.0000 8.0 280 7.9375 to 8.0000 10.0 2A0 9.9375 to 10.0000 12.0 2C0 11.9375 to 12.0000
261 6.0000 to 6.0625 281 8.0000 to 8.0625 2A1 10.0000 to 10.0625 2C1 12.0000 to 12.0625
262 6.0625 to 6.1250 282 8.0625 to 8.1250 2A2 10.0625 to 10.1250 2C2 12.0625 to 12.1250
263 6.1250 to 6.1875 283 8.1250 to 8.1875 2A3 10.1250 to 10.1875 2C3 12.1250 to 12.1875
264 6.1875 to 6.2500 284 8.1875 to 8.2500 2A4 10.1875 to 10.2500 2C4 12.1875 to 12.2500

No. 2D201-063E*E
98
Table 6.2-1 Relationship between tilt encoder value and actual angle (7/9)

Display Encoder Display Encoder Display Encoder Display Encoder


angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG)
(DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX)
2C5 12.2500 to 12.3125 2E5 14.2500 to 14.3125 305 16.2500 to 16.3125 325 18.2500 to 18.3125
2C6 12.3125 to 12.3750 2E6 14.3125 to 14.3750 306 16.3125 to 16.3750 326 18.3125 to 18.3750
2C7 12.3750 to 12.4375 2E7 14.3750 to 14.4375 307 16.3750 to 16.4375 327 18.3750 to 18.4375
12.5 2C8 12.4375 to 12.5000 14.5 2E8 14.4375 to 14.5000 16.5 308 16.4375 to 16.5000 18.5 328 18.4375 to 18.5000
2C9 12.5000 to 12.5625 2E9 14.5000 to 14.5625 309 16.5000 to 16.5625 329 18.5000 to 18.5625
2CA 12.5625 to 12.6250 2EA 14.5625 to 14.6250 30A 16.5625 to 16.6250 32A 18.5625 to 18.6250
2CB 12.6250 to 12.6875 2EB 14.6250 to 14.6875 30B 16.6250 to 16.6875 32B 18.6250 to 18.6875
2CC 12.6875 to 12.7500 2EC 14.6875 to 14.7500 30C 16.6875 to 16.7500 32C 18.6875 to 18.7500
2CD 12.7500 to 12.8125 2ED 14.7500 to 14.8125 30D 16.7500 to 16.8125 32D 18.7500 to 18.8125
2CE 12.8125 to 12.8750 2EE 14.8125 to 14.8750 30E 16.8125 to 16.8750 32E 18.8125 to 18.8750
2CF 12.8750 to 12.9375 2EF 14.8750 to 14.9375 30F 16.8750 to 16.9375 32F 18.8750 to 18.9375
13.0 2D0 12.9375 to 13.0000 15.0 2F0 14.9375 to 15.0000 17.0 310 16.9375 to 17.0000 19.0 330 18.9375 to 19.0000
2D1 13.0000 to 13.0625 2F1 15.0000 to 15.0625 311 17.0000 to 17.0625 331 19.0000 to 19.0625
2D2 13.0625 to 13.1250 2F2 15.0625 to 15.1250 312 17.0625 to 17.1250 332 19.0625 to 19.1250
2D3 13.1250 to 13.1875 2F3 15.1250 to 15.1875 313 17.1250 to 17.1875 333 19.1250 to 19.1875
2D4 13.1875 to 13.2500 2F4 15.1875 to 15.2500 314 17.1875 to 17.2500 334 19.1875 to 19.2500
2D5 13.2500 to 13.3125 2F5 15.2500 to 15.3125 315 17.2500 to 17.3125 335 19.2500 to 19.3125
2D6 13.3125 to 13.3750 2F6 15.3125 to 15.3750 316 17.3125 to 17.3750 336 19.3125 to 19.3750
2D7 13.3750 to 13.4375 2F7 15.3750 to 15.4375 317 17.3750 to 17.4375 337 19.3750 to 19.4375
13.5 2D8 13.4375 to 13.5000 15.5 2F8 15.4375 to 15.5000 17.5 318 17.4375 to 17.5000 19.5 338 19.4375 to 19.5000
2D9 13.5000 to 13.5625 2F9 15.5000 to 15.5625 319 17.5000 to 17.5625 339 19.5000 to 19.5625
2DA 13.5625 to 13.6250 2FA 15.5625 to 15.6250 31A 17.5625 to 17.6250 33A 19.5625 to 19.6250
2DB 13.6250 to 13.6875 2FB 15.6250 to 15.6875 31B 17.6250 to 17.6875 33B 19.6250 to 19.6875
2DC 13.6875 to 13.7500 2FC 15.6875 to 15.7500 31C 17.6875 to 17.7500 33C 19.6875 to 19.7500
2DD 13.7500 to 13.8125 2FD 15.7500 to 15.8125 31D 17.7500 to 17.8125 33D 19.7500 to 19.8125
2DE 13.8125 to 13.8750 2FE 15.8125 to 15.8750 31E 17.8125 to 17.8750 33E 19.8125 to 19.8750
2DF 13.8750 to 13.9375 2FF 15.8750 to 15.9375 31F 17.8750 to 17.9375 33F 19.8750 to 19.9375
14.0 2E0 13.9375 to 14.0000 16.0 300 15.9375 to 16.0000 18.0 320 17.9375 to 18.0000 20.0 340 19.9375 to 20.0000
2E1 14.0000 to 14.0625 301 16.0000 to 16.0625 321 18.0000 to 18.0625 341 20.0000 to 20.0625
2E2 14.0625 to 14.1250 302 16.0625 to 16.1250 322 18.0625 to 18.1250 342 20.0625 to 20.1250
2E3 14.1250 to 14.1875 303 16.1250 to 16.1875 323 18.1250 to 18.1875 343 20.1250 to 20.1875
2E4 14.1875 to 14.2500 304 16.1875 to 16.2500 324 18.1875 to 18.2500 344 20.1875 to 20.2500

No. 2D201-063E*E
99
Table 6.2-1 Relationship between tilt encoder value and actual angle (8/9)

Display Encoder Display Encoder Display Encoder Display Encoder


angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG)
(DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX)
345 20.2500 to 20.3125 365 22.2500 to 22.3125 385 24.2500 to 24.3125 3A5 26.2500 to 26.3125
346 20.3125 to 20.3750 366 22.3125 to 22.3750 386 24.3125 to 24.3750 3A6 26.3125 to 26.3750
347 20.3750 to 20.4375 367 22.3750 to 22.4375 387 24.3750 to 24.4375 3A7 26.3750 to 26.4375
20.5 348 20.4375 to 20.5000 22.5 368 22.4375 to 22.5000 24.5 388 24.4375 to 24.5000 26.5 3A8 26.4375 to 26.5000
349 20.5000 to 20.5625 369 22.5000 to 22.5625 389 24.5000 to 24.5625 3A9 26.5000 to 26.5625
34A 20.5625 to 20.6250 36A 22.5625 to 22.6250 38A 24.5625 to 24.6250 3AA 26.5625 to 26.6250
34B 20.6250 to 20.6875 36B 22.6250 to 22.6875 38B 24.6250 to 24.6875 3AB 26.6250 to 26.6875
34C 20.6875 to 20.7500 36C 22.6875 to 22.7500 38C 24.6875 to 24.7500 3AC 26.6875 to 26.7500
34D 20.7500 to 20.8125 36D 22.7500 to 22.8125 38D 24.7500 to 24.8125 3AD 26.7500 to 26.8125
34E 20.8125 to 20.8750 36E 22.8125 to 22.8750 38E 24.8125 to 24.8750 3AE 26.8125 to 26.8750
34F 20.8750 to 20.9375 36F 22.8750 to 22.9375 38F 24.8750 to 24.9375 3AF 26.8750 to 26.9375
21.0 350 20.9375 to 21.0000 23.0 370 22.9375 to 23.0000 25.0 390 24.9375 to 25.0000 27.0 3B0 26.9375 to 27.0000
351 21.0000 to 21.0625 371 23.0000 to 23.0625 391 25.0000 to 25.0625 3B1 27.0000 to 27.0625
352 21.0625 to 21.1250 372 23.0625 to 23.1250 392 25.0625 to 25.1250 3B2 27.0625 to 27.1250
353 21.1250 to 21.1875 373 23.1250 to 23.1875 393 25.1250 to 25.1875 3B3 27.1250 to 27.1875
354 21.1875 to 21.2500 374 23.1875 to 23.2500 394 25.1875 to 25.2500 3B4 27.1875 to 27.2500
355 21.2500 to 21.3125 375 23.2500 to 23.3125 395 25.2500 to 25.3125 3B5 27.2500 to 27.3125
356 21.3125 to 21.3750 376 23.3125 to 23.3750 396 25.3125 to 25.3750 3B6 27.3125 to 27.3750
357 21.3750 to 21.4375 377 23.3750 to 23.4375 397 25.3750 to 25.4375 3B7 27.3750 to 27.4375
21.5 358 21.4375 to 21.5000 23.5 378 23.4375 to 23.5000 25.5 398 25.4375 to 25.5000 27.5 3B8 27.4375 to 27.5000
359 21.5000 to 21.5625 379 23.5000 to 23.5625 399 25.5000 to 25.5625 3B9 27.5000 to 27.5625
35A 21.5625 to 21.6250 37A 23.5625 to 23.6250 39A 25.5625 to 25.6250 3BA 27.5625 to 27.6250
35B 21.6250 to 21.6875 37B 23.6250 to 23.6875 39B 25.6250 to 25.6875 3BB 27.6250 to 27.6875
35C 21.6875 to 21.7500 37C 23.6875 to 23.7500 39C 25.6875 to 25.7500 3BC 27.6875 to 27.7500
35D 21.7500 to 21.8125 37D 23.7500 to 23.8125 39D 25.7500 to 25.8125 3BD 27.7500 to 27.8125
35E 21.8125 to 21.8750 37E 23.8125 to 23.8750 39E 25.8125 to 25.8750 3BE 27.8125 to 27.8750
35F 21.8750 to 21.9375 37F 23.8750 to 23.9375 39F 25.8750 to 25.9375 3BF 27.8750 to 27.9375
22.0 360 21.9375 to 22.0000 24.0 380 23.9375 to 24.0000 26.0 3A0 25.9375 to 26.0000 28.0 3C0 27.9375 to 28.0000
361 22.0000 to 22.0625 381 24.0000 to 24.0625 3A1 26.0000 to 26.0625 3C1 28.0000 to 28.0625
362 22.0625 to 22.1250 382 24.0625 to 24.1250 3A2 26.0625 to 26.1250 3C2 28.0625 to 28.1250
363 22.1250 to 22.1875 383 24.1250 to 24.1875 3A3 26.1250 to 26.1875 3C3 28.1250 to 28.1875
364 22.1875 to 22.2500 384 24.1875 to 24.2500 3A4 26.1875 to 26.2500 3C4 28.1875 to 28.2500

No. 2D201-063E*E
100
Table 6.2-1 Relationship between tilt encoder value and actual angle (9/9)

Display Encoder Display Encoder Display Encoder Display Encoder


angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG) angle value Actual angle (DEG)
(DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX) (DEG) (HEX)
3C5 28.2500 to 28.3125 3E5 30.2500 to 30.3125
3C6 28.3125 to 28.3750 3E6 30.3125 to 30.3750
3C7 28.3750 to 28.4375 3E7 30.3750 to 30.4375
28.5 3C8 28.4375 to 28.5000 30.5 3E8 30.4375 to 30.5000
3C9 28.5000 to 28.5625 3E9 30.5000 to 30.5625
3CA 28.5625 to 28.6250 3EA 30.5625 to 30.6250
3CB 28.6250 to 28.6875 3EB 30.6250 to 30.6875
3CC 28.6875 to 28.7500 3EC 30.6875 to 30.7500
3CD 28.7500 to 28.8125 3ED 30.7500 to 30.8125
3CE 28.8125 to 28.8750 3EE 30.8125 to 30.8750
3CF 28.8750 to 28.9375 3EF 30.8750 to 30.9375
29.0 3D0 28.9375 to 29.0000 31.0 3F0 30.9375 to 31.0000
3D1 29.0000 to 29.0625 3F1 31.0000 to 31.0625
3D2 29.0625 to 29.1250 3F2 31.0625 to 31.1250
3D3 29.1250 to 29.1875 3F3 31.1250 to 31.1875
3D4 29.1875 to 29.2500 3F4 31.1875 to 31.2500
3D5 29.2500 to 29.3125 3F5 31.2500 to 31.3125
3D6 29.3125 to 29.3750 3F6 31.3125 to 31.3750
3D7 29.3750 to 29.4375 3F7 31.3750 to 31.4375
29.5 3D8 29.4375 to 29.5000 31.5 3F8 31.4375 to 31.5000
3D9 29.5000 to 29.5625 3F9 31.5000 to 31.5625
3DA 29.5625 to 29.6250 3FA 31.5625 to 31.6250
3DB 29.6250 to 29.6875 3FB 31.6250 to 31.6875
3DC 29.6875 to 29.7500 3FC 31.6875 to 31.7500
3DD 29.7500 to 29.8125 3FD 31.7500 to 31.8125
3DE 29.8125 to 29.8750 3FE 31.8125 to 31.8750
3DF 29.8750 to 29.9375 3FF 31.8750 to 31.9375
30.0 3E0 29.9375 to 30.0000 32.0
3E1 30.0000 to 30.0625
3E2 30.0625 to 30.1250
3E3 30.1250 to 30.1875
3E4 30.1875 to 30.2500

No. 2D201-063E*E
101
6.3 KGTSM Timer Checks (Including Timer Errors)
6.3.1 Outline

The KGTSM PWB has five 15-channel function-control timers. The KGTSM checks the
operations of these timers in the initial sequence when the KGTSM power is turned ON
and outputs the result (message) to the PC.

<Tools required>

(1) PC

(2) Service cable (GR-1, as standard)

(3) Programs: Hyper Terminal etc.

<Procedures for checking timer functions>

(1) Connect the PC to connector CN404 of the KGTSM PWB with the service cable.

(2) Start the Hyper Terminal program on the PC.


(For the start-up procedures, refer to subsection 4.7 "Setting the Hyper Terminal"
of the installation manual (2C201-150E).)

(3) Turn ON the power to the gantry. (If the gantry power is already ON, turn OFF the
power to the gantry, wait a moment, then turn ON the power to the gantry.)

(4) Check the message on the PC.

(a) "Timer check start Timer check done"

This message indicates that the timer check has ended normally.

(b) "INIT: Timer Fail"

This message indicates that timer check was defective.

6.3.2 Timer error

If any channel is found defective in the initial sequence timer check, the KGTSM turns
ON bit D2 of the o10 error status message and becomes disabled.

No. 2D201-063E*E
102
7. Gantry Rotation
The servicing of the gantry rotation section is described in this section.

DANGER: 1. When servicing is to be performed with the gantry cover


open, be sure to turn OFF the power of the system at the
distribution board to prevent workers from receiving
electric shocks or being injured due to unexpected system
operations.

2. If it is necessary to perform servicing with the system


turned ON, supply power only to the required parts. At the
same time, take safety measures such as turning OFF the
power of the cover switch and the NFB120 (power to the
rotation servo motor).

7.1 Stop Position


7.1.1 Aquilion stop position

There are four stop positions of the Aquilion gantry rotation section:

(1) Top (0°) 0°

(2) Right side (90°)

(3) Bottom (180°)

(4) Left side (270°)


270 ° 90°

180°

• The X-ray tube is stopped at the top position (0°) after continuous rotation of the
gantry.
At this position the positioning projector can be accurately aligned with the patient.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*E
103
7.2 Gantry Rotation Interlock
(When the Gantry Cover Is Opened)
When any one of the front cover, left side cover (viewed from the front), or rear upper
cover of the gantry is opened, the cover switch is set to OFF and gantry rotation is
disabled. (At this time, MC120 is also turned OFF, which interrupts the power supply to
the DD motor.)
To rotate the gantry with a cover opened, set the "Enable" switch to ON (up position)
and reset the KGTSM PWB. Gantry rotation is enabled and the rotation lamp lights.

Î Refer to table 7.2-1 "List of


the gantry cover interlocks".

Cover SW:
MS120

Enable SW:
SW120

CAUTION: Do not perform ON/OFF operation of SW120 during gantry rotation.


Doing so may damage the DD motor controller. To turn OFF the power,
use NFB120.

NOTE: 1. If a DD motor error is detected by the KGTSM, the status of that error is
retained as is, and the gantry cannot be rotated by operation from the
console even if the rotation enable status is entered.
This error is resolved by resetting the KGTSM.

2. Be sure to set the enable switch (SW120) downward when the gantry
covers are closed. If the cover is closed with this switch set to the up
position, the gantry cannot be rotated.

3. Opening/closing the front cover, ON/OFF operation of SW120, or ON/OFF


operation of servo breaker NFB120 interrupts the power supply to the DD
motor.
In this case, be sure to reset the KGTSM PWB.

4. If NFB120 or SW120 operation is performed during resetting of the KGTSM


PWB, the rotation warning lamp may light for a few seconds and then go
out depending on the timing. This is not abnormal. In this case, be sure to
reset the KGTSM PWB again.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
104
Table 7.2-1A List of the gantry cover interlocks (for serial number "S/N Axxxxx")

Conditions Gantry status


Rotation Front cover Rotation KGTSM PWB Power Remarks
No. breaker Gantry
Cover SW Enable SW warning LED status contactor rotation Description of use
NFB120 lamp Error
MS120 SW120 LED38 LED37 message MC 120
1 OFF --- --- Out Out Out *1 OFF Disabled The DD motor power is turned OFF for maintenance use.
2 ON ON Down Out Lit Lit None ON Enabled The cover is closed for clinical application. [Normal-use status]
3 ON OFF Down Out Out Out *2 OFF Disabled The front cover is open. [For maintenance use]
4 ON OFF Up Lit Lit Lit None ON Enabled The front cover is open but rotation is enabled. [For maintenance use]
5 ON ON Up Out Out Out *2 OFF Disabled The front cover is closed and the rotation enable switch remains ON
(enabled).
[Setting error by service personnel]

(1) Cover switch : ON = With the cover closed


OFF = With the cover open
(2) Enable (rotation) switch : Up = Gantry rotation is enabled when the cover is opened.
Down = Gantry rotation is disabled when the cover is opened.
(3) Rotation warning lamp : Lit = Gantry rotation is enabled when the cover is opened and disabled when the cover is closed.
Out = Gantry rotation is disabled when the cover is opened and enabled when the cover is closed.
(4) KGTSM LED38 (alarm) : Lit = Gantry rotation is enabled (the servo amplifier is normal).
Out = The servo amplifier alarm signal is being output (error status).
(5) KGTSM LED37
(servo ready) : Lit = Gantry rotation is enabled (the servo amplifier is normal).
Out = Gantry rotation is disabled (the servo amplifier is not ready for operation).
(6) Contactor MC120 : ON = 200 V is supplied to drive the DD motor.
OFF = 200 V for DD motor driving is not supplied.
*1 --------- Turn ON the power with rotation breaker NFB120 set to OFF. → ROTE: Servo ready error, ROTE: Servo on error,
ROTE: ACK/NAK receive over time
Set NFB120 to OFF in normal use. → ROTE: The message "Alarm receive, ROTE:ACK/NAK receive over time" is displayed and the lamp
immediately goes out.
When NFB120 is turned ON within approximately 6 seconds, the lamp lights and status No. 2 or No. 4 is
achieved. After approximately 6 seconds, communication with the DD motor results in an error. In this
case, turning ON NFB120 does not recover the system. In order to recover the system, resetting of the
KGTSM is required.
*2 --------- Turn ON the power with the conditions set to No. 3 or 5 in the table → ROTE: Servo ready error, ROTE: Servo on error

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D 105
Table 7.2-1B List of the gantry cover interlocks (for serial number "S/N Bxxxxx")

Conditions Gantry status


Rotation Front cover Rotation KGTSM PWB Power Remarks
No. breaker Gantry
Cover SW Enable SW warning LED status contactor rotation Description of use
NFB120 lamp Error
MS120 SW120 LED38 LED37 message MC 120
1 OFF --- --- Out Out Out *1 OFF Disabled The DD motor power is turned OFF for maintenance use.
2 ON ON Down Out Lit Lit None ON Enabled The cover is closed for clinical application. [Normal-use status]
3 ON OFF Down Out Lit Out *2 OFF Disabled The front cover is open. [For maintenance use]
4 ON OFF Up Lit Lit Lit None ON Enabled The front cover is open but rotation is enabled. [For maintenance use]
5 ON ON Up Out Lit Out *2 OFF Disabled The front cover is closed and the rotation enable switch remains ON
(enabled).
[Setting error by service personnel]

(1) Cover switch : ON = With the cover closed


OFF = With the cover open
(2) Enable (rotation) switch : Up = Gantry rotation is enabled when the cover is opened.
Down = Gantry rotation is disabled when the cover is opened.
(3) Rotation warning lamp : Lit = Gantry rotation is enabled when the cover is opened and disabled when the cover is closed.
Out = Gantry rotation is disabled when the cover is opened and enabled when the cover is closed.
(4) KGTSM LED38 (alarm) : Lit = Gantry rotation is enabled (the servo amplifier is normal).
Out = The servo amplifier alarm signal is being output (error status).
(5) KGTSM LED37
(servo ready) : Lit = Gantry rotation is enabled (the servo amplifier is normal).
Out = Gantry rotation is disabled (the servo amplifier is not ready for operation).
(6) Contactor MC120 : ON = 200 V is supplied to drive the DD motor.
OFF = 200 V for DD motor driving is not supplied.
*1 --------- Turn ON the power with rotation breaker NFB120 set to OFF. → ROTE: Servo ready error
ROTE: ACK/NAK receive over time
Set NFB120 to OFF in normal use. → ROTE: The message "Alarm receive, ROTE:ACK/NAK receive over time" is displayed and the lamp
immediately goes out.
*2 --------- Servo OFF status (after power is supplied or the KGTSM is reset) → No error message
Servo lock status (after the rotation command is sent, rotation is performed and then rotation stops) → ROTE: Alarm receive,
ROTE: Alarm data > 0 × 38
(0 × 38 for the 0th byte)

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D 106
7.3 Rotation Speed of the Gantry Servo Motor
7.3.1 Check of the rotation speed of the gantry

The KGTSM has a function to check the rotation speed of the gantry. After the gantry
starts to rotate and acceleration to the specified rotation speed is completed, the
KGTSM checks its rotation speed and performs the following according to the speed:

(1) When the rotation speed is within ±3%


of the specified speed : Normal. The KGTSM allows the gantry to
continue rotating.

(2) When the rotation speed is more than


3% of the specified speed : Speed error. The KGTSM stops.

(3) Speed correction : In Aquilion, automatic speed correction is


not performed. If the speed is to be
adjusted within 3% of the specified speed,
use DSW12.

No. 2D201-063E*E
107
7.4 Gantry Rotation Speed Check and Fine Adjustment
Procedure
7.4.1 Outline

This subsection describes procedures to check and finely adjust the rotation speed of
the gantry.
The rotation speed of the gantry at the start-up of the gantry and speed data can be
obtained by executing a speed check.
In addition, rotation speed fine adjustment within ±3% can be performed.

CAUTION: Be careful when rotating the gantry.

<Tools required>

(1) PC

(2) Service cable (GR-1, as standard)

(3) Programs: Hyper Terminal etc.

<Procedures to check the rotation speed of the gantry>

(1) Connect the PC to connector CN404 of


the KGTSM PWB with the service cable.
KGTSM CN404
(2) Start the Hyper Terminal program on the
PC. PC
(For the start-up procedures, refer to
subsection 4.6 "Setting the Hyper
Terminal" of the installation manual
(2C201-150E).) (1)

(3) Enter as needed from the maintenance panel (or the console) to rotate the gantry
at a speed of 1.5 seconds per rotation.

1) Set the lever of the PANEL switch (SW1) to ON (downward).

2) Set "8" (SCAN) on switch SW32.

3) Set switch SW31 to "3" (1.5 seconds per rotation), "4" (1.0 seconds per
rotation), "5" (0.75 seconds per rotation), "6" (0.5 seconds per rotation), "7" (0.6
seconds per rotation) or "8" (0.4 seconds per rotation).

4) Press the SET switch (SW11) and the SCAN switch (SW12) at the same time
and hold them down. The gantry starts to rotate.

5) Release the SET switch and the SCAN switch to stop the gantry from rotating.

No. 2D201-063E*E
108
CAUTION: When checking or performing fine adjustment of the gantry rotation
speed, observe the following precautions.

• Do not set the panel switch (SW1) to OFF (upward) before all
operations from the maintenance panel are completed.
• After using the maintenance panel, be sure to set the panel switch
OFF and reset the KGTSM.

NOTE: If continuous scanning (that is, a set of start and stop operations
performed consecutively) is performed repeatedly (more than five times),
the main power supply of the DD motor amplifier may go OFF. This is
caused by actuation of the protective circuit (THERMAL SW), and is not
an abnormality.
Note that when a twenty-second pause time is taken between each single
scan, scanning can be repeated as many times as required.

(4) Confirm the gantry rotation speed by checking the KGTSM message displayed on
the PC after the gantry starts rotating and the speed becomes constant.

• If the error of the rotation speed of the gantry is ±3% or less

Read the current gantry speed and the standard gantry speed on the PC and
compare them. When the error is ±3% or less, the KGTSM allows the gantry to
keep on rotating.

ROTE : current : 0 x ∆∆∆∆ std : Standard rotation speed



Current rotation speed of the gantry
(Should be as close to Standard
rotation speed as possible)

Standard rotation speed

• 1.5, 1.0, 0.75 seconds per rotation : 0x033f


• 0.6 seconds per rotation : 0x0298
• 0.5, 0.4 seconds per rotation : 0x0229

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
109
• If the rotation speed exceeds 3% difference from the standard

The KGTSM outputs the following message and stops the rotation of the gantry.

ROTE : speed error : 0 x ∆∆∆∆ std : 0 x 0680



Rotation speed of the gantry

Gantry rotation speed data: 0.4-, 0.5-second system

+3% 0x 023A The current rotation speed of the gantry is 3%


slower than the standard speed.
Standard 0x 0229 The current rotation speed is exactly equal to
the standard speed.
-3% 0x 0218 The current rotation speed of the gantry is 3%
faster than the standard speed.

Gantry rotation speed data: 0.6-second system

+3% 0x 02AC The current rotation speed of the gantry is 3%


slower than the standard speed.
Standard 0x 0298 The current rotation speed is exactly equal to
the standard speed.
-3% 0x 0284 The current rotation speed of the gantry is 3%
faster than the standard speed.

Gantry rotation speed data: 1.5-, 1.0-, 0.75-second system

+3% 0x 0358 The current rotation speed of the gantry is 3%


slower than the standard speed.
Standard 0x 033F The current rotation speed is exactly equal to
the standard speed.
-3% 0x 0326 The current rotation speed of the gantry is 3%
faster than the standard speed.

No. 2D201-063E*E
110
<Fine adjustment procedure>

(1) Check the speed data at the time of adjustment in the same manner as the
speed check in the previous step.

(2) The rotation speed can be adjusted to 0% up to ±3% in 0.5% increments


using DIP switch 12 (DSW12). (Default: 0%)

(3) DIP switch settings for assigning the speed are as described in the table
below.

ON
DSW12

OFF
SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1

Table 7.4-1 DSW12 setting table

No. SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1 Setting speed (%)


1 OFF ON ON ON ±0.0
2 OFF ON ON OFF +3.0
3 OFF ON OFF ON +2.5
4 OFF ON OFF OFF +2.0
5 OFF OFF ON ON +1.5
6 OFF OFF ON OFF +1.0
7 OFF OFF OFF ON +0.5
8 OFF OFF OFF OFF ±0.0
9 ON OFF OFF ON -0.5
10 ON OFF ON OFF -1.0
11 ON OFF ON ON -1.5
12 ON ON OFF OFF -2.0
13 ON ON OFF ON -2.5
14 ON ON ON OFF -3.0
15 ON ON ON ON ±0.0

*: "+" setting reduces the speed and "-" setting increases the speed.

*: When the maximum rotation speed is specified, the speed cannot be


increased even if "-" setting (increase of speed) is selected. (The speed
cannot be adjusted in the "-" direction.)

No. 2D201-063E*E
111
7.5 DD Motor Error Messages (Servo Amplifier Error Display)
7.5.1 When the serial number is "S/N Axxxxx"

If a DD motor error occurs, the same error message as that on the KGTSM PWB can be
verified with the LED of the servo amplifier.

In addition, you can check the contents of the errors at the servo amplifier, going back
to the fifteenth error from the current one.
When the cover (cap) of the servo unit is removed, the servo amplifier maintenance
panel can be accessed. Perform the error check while in this status.

Displays the error status,


the error number, etc.

SEL MODE

MON Use the operation keys to


reset the monitor and the
error.

Figure 7.5.1-1 Servo amplifier maintenance panel

(1) Display immediately after the error has occurred (in the status in which the error is
not cleared from the KGTSM PWB yet, or turning the power supply ON/OFF is not
performed)

A.L ∗ ∗. ← ** indicates the number of the error that has occurred.

*: The display is r 0 in normal operation (status display mode). This


indicates that the gantry stops. 0 is the number of gantry rotations.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
112
(2) To view the error history

Mechanical speed high-order digits

Pulse instruction low-order Mechanical speed low-order


digits digits

Pulse instruction high-order Analog input 2 voltage


digits

Deviaton value low-order Software version


Analog input 1 voltage
digits

Status
Deviaton value high- Motor current
display
order digits
mode
Alarm history Option status
Instruction value low- Effective load rate
order digits Check
mode

Instruction value high- Electronic thermal value


order digits
Alarm Link axis number
Present value lower- Motor phase amount
order digits

Present value high-order Absorption rate MODE

digits

Number of motor rotations General-purpose input/output

Figure 7.5.1-2 Changes in display by MODE operation

(a) When the MODE key is pressed once, the system enters the check mode.

Press the key or the key to display the alarm history display
.

(b) With displayed, press the key and the SEL key
simultaneously. The system is set to the mode in which the contents of past
errors are displayed. If the leftmost numerical value is 0, the error contents
are the newest. Press or to sequentially change the error contents.

∗∗

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
113
(c) When the MODE key is pressed, the display returns to .

When the MODE


key is further pressed, the display returns to
(status display mode).

(3) To clear the error contents

(a) When the key and the SEL key are pressed simultaneously with

displayed, the display changes to


∗∗ (in the

same status as that shown on the previous page).

(b) When the key and the key are pressed simultaneously while holding

down the SEL key, the display changes to .

(c) When the key and the SEL key are pressed simultaneously, the display
blinks.

(d) Pressing the key clears the contents.

(e) Pressing the MODE key twice returns the display to


∗∗ .

(f) Pressing the MODE


key returns the display to .

(g) Pressing the MODE


key returns the display to .

No. 2D201-063E*E
114
7.5.2 When the serial number is "S/N Bxxxxx"

If a DD motor error occurs, the same error message as that on the KGTSM PWB can be
verified with the LED of the servo amplifier.

In addition, you can check the contents of the errors at the servo amplifier, going back
to the sixteenth error from the current one.
When the cover (cap) of the servo unit is removed, the servo amplifier maintenance
panel can be accessed. Perform the error check while in this status.

Displays the error status,


the error number, etc.
Use the operation keys to
reset the monitor and the
error.
MODE SEL SET

Figure 7.5.2-1 Servo amplifier maintenance panel

(1) Display immediately after the error has occurred (in the status in which the error is
not cleared from the KGTSM PWB yet, or turning the power supply ON/OFF is not
performed)

A.L ∗ ∗. ← ** indicates the number of the error that has occurred.

*: The display is r 0 in normal operation (status display mode). This


indicates that the gantry stops. 0 is the number of gantry rotations.
( r 150 for 0.4-s rotation)

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
115
(2) To view the error history

Speed command voltage

Mechanical speed low-order Electric current command


digits voltage

Mechanical speed high-order Motor current


digits

Pulse instruction low-order Effective load rate Software version Option status
digits

Pulse instruction high-order Electronic thermal value Alarm history Axis number
digits

Deviaton value low-order Absorption rate MODE


digits Status Alarm Power unit status
display area Check
Motor phase amount (electrical display area
degree)

Deviaton value high-order Number-of-center-pulses: high-order General-purpose Warning output


digits digits output

Instruction value low-order Number-of-center-pulses: low-order


digits digits
General-purpose Servo lock insufficient
Instruction value high-order input condition
PN voltage
digits

Present value lower-order Fin temperature


General-purpose input/output
digits

Present value high-order Motor angle (degrees)


digits
MODE
Number of motor rotations
Figure showing
MODE the sequence of
operations Speed command zero adjustment
Control mode
Setting value Setting value Setting value Setting value

AMOUT Output scale Motor code AOUT Zero adjustment Speed command span
adjustment

Setting value User Setting value Setting value Setting value


Adjustment
parameter area
area
AMOUT Output selection Resolver cable length VOUT Zero adjustment Electric current command zero
adjustment

Setting value
Setting value Setting value

Electronic gear (numerator)

Electronic gear Setting value


(denominator) Electric current span adjustment
MODE MODE

Tuning mode Setting value Target loop gain Setting value Load inertia

Tuning parameter area SEL For 5 seconds


Filter tuning
(auto tuning)

Setting value Observer gain Setting value Observer type Gain reduction during stop

MODE double-clicking

Figure 7.5.2-2 Changes in display by MODE operation

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
116
(a) When the MODE key is pressed once, the system enters the check mode.
Press the V key or the W key to display the alarm history display
.

(b) With displayed, press the SEL key and the SET key
simultaneously. The system is set to the mode in which the contents of past
errors are displayed. If the leftmost numerical value is 0, the error contents
are the newest. Press V or W to sequentially change the error contents.

∗∗
(c) When the MODE key is pressed, the display returns to .

When the MODE key is pressed further four times, the display returns to
(status display mode).

(3) To clear the error contents

(a) When the SEL key and the SET key are pressed simultaneously with

displayed, the display changes to


∗∗ (in the

same status as that shown on the previous page).

(b) When the V key and the W key are held down simultaneously for 5 seconds
while holding down the SEL key, the display changes to .

(c) When the SEL key and the SET key are pressed simultaneously, the display
blinks.

(d) Pressing the SET key clears the contents.

(e) Pressing the MODE key twice returns the display to


∗∗ .

(f) Pressing the MODE key returns the display to .

(g) Pressing the MODE key another four times returns the display to
.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
117
7.6 Outline of Operation of the Gantry Rotation System and
Troubleshooting
7.6.1 When the serial number is "S/N Axxxxx"

7.6.1.1 Outline of operation

(1) Until gantry rotation is ready (refer to figure 7.6.1-1)

(a) When the power is turned ON (reset the KGTSM PWB), the initialization
sequence incorporated in the KGTSM PWB starts operating. The initialization
sequence turns ON the relay mounted on the KGTSM PWB, which sets
MC120 to ON and the main power is supplied to the servo amplifier.
(→ If the front cover is opened, a lamp lights.)

(b) The servo amplifier returns the ready signal to the KGTSM PWB after 3 to 5
seconds.

(c) When it is normal, this status is referred to as "the rotation enable status".
Manual rotation is only possible immediately after the power is turned ON.

(d) If an error has already occurred when the power is turned ON (or when the
KGTSM PWB is reset), the relay on the KGTSM PWB is OFF in step (b)
above and MC120 is also OFF. As a result, the main servo amplifier power is
also OFF.
(→ When the front cover is open, a lamp is extinguished.)

(2) Start of rotation

(a) When rotation is instructed from the console or the maintenance panel, the
KGTSM PWB outputs the servo ON signal to the servo amplifier. The servo
amplifier locks the DD motor (referred to as "servo lock") based on the servo
ON signal.
(An electrical brake is engaged and the DD motor cannot be rotated
manually.)

(b) This servo lock status is achieved when MC121 is set to ON (a click is heard)
and the DD motor coil is energized by the servo amplifier.
(When MC121 is set to ON, the shorting of phases A, B, and C of the DD
motor is released.)

(c) After this, the gantry rotates at the rotation speed corresponding to the
instructed speed.

(3) Stoppage of rotation

(a) When stoppage of rotation is instructed from the console or the maintenance
panel, gantry rotation stops.

(b) After rotation has stopped, the servo lock status continues and therefore
manual rotation is impossible.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
118
(4) When an error occurs

(a) If an error occurs during rotation, the servo amplifier detects the error first.
(The gantry enters the servo free status and continues to rotate for 8 to 10
seconds by the inertial force and then stops.)

(b) At the same time that the corresponding error code is displayed on the servo
amplifier monitor panel, the error message indicating the same error is
displayed on the KGTSM PWB.

(c) There are two types of errors: errors that can be corrected by pressing the OK
button on the console and errors requiring switching the gantry power supply
OFF and then ON.
(If an error requiring ON/OFF of the gantry power supply occurs, the KGTSM
PWB turns OFF the relay of the KGTSP PWB, resulting in OFF of MC120.)

KGTSM PWB

KGTSP PWB
10800 pulse
Relay ON
signal Servo ON signal
RY Command
SW120,MS220
TGR1,TGM1 10800 pulse MR sensor
system
Alarm

24 VDC MC120

Servo amplifier
DD motor
200 VAC Breaker

For motive power source

For the control PWB MC121

The servo locks by the servo ON signal.


When the servo is locked, MC121 is turned
ON and the contact opens.
When the servo is free, MC121 is turned OFF
and the contact closes.

Figure 7.6.1-1 Configuration of the gantry rotation system

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
119
7.6.1.2 Corrective measures against an error

* If an error occurs, first check that the peripheral cables of the servo amplifier, the DD
motor, and the MR sensor are connected correctly and that they are not
disconnected (after work in particular).

The message "Error in Gantry Rotation" is displayed on the console.

Was the
No
power turned OFF Check the contents with the error
and then ON again after message on the KGTSM PWB.
the error occurred?

Yes

Check the error code (error


history) on the servo amplifier.

Figure 7.6.1-2 Error message check flowchart in the case where an error occurs

* Speed errors, overshooting errors, Z-phase not being input errors, and abnormal
positioning errors are not displayed on the monitor panel on the servo amplifier side.
Only the error messages displayed on the KGTSM PWB are helpful to check these
errors.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
120
7.6.1.3 Presumed causes of errors, investigation, and countermeasures

(1) Overcurrent error

(a) Presumed cause

Shorted cables between the DD motor and inside the servo amplifier,
malfunction of the parts inside the servo amplifier, malfunction of the hole IC

(b) Investigation/countermeasures

<1> Check the connections of the cables between the DD motor and the
servo amplifier.

<2> Check the electrical continuity of MC121 (between pins 1 and 2 and
between pins 5 and 6)
When MC121 is turned ON → The contact must open.
When MC121 is turned OFF → The contact must close.
If the operation of the contact is abnormal when MC121 is turned ON
and OFF, replace MC121.

<3> Open the metal cap of the MR sensor and check pins 3, 4, and 5 of CN2
using an oscilloscope (5 VDC). After setting the oscilloscope, turn ON
the power of the gantry and manually rotate the gantry. When pulse
waves are displayed on the oscilloscope, the system is normal.
Otherwise, the hole IC or the cable FCS52 is considered to be defective.
Contact Nasu Operations.

<4> If the error is not corrected by <1>, <2>, and <3>, replace the servo
amplifier.

(2) Overvoltage error

(a) Presumed cause

Abnormal power supply input to the servo amplifier

(b) Investigation/countermeasures

<1> Check the servo amplifier input AC voltage.


(If 200 VAC varies due to noise etc, check the electrical continuity and
output voltage of LF120, NFB120, MC120, MC112, and LF1 and also
check the input line voltage of the system.)

<2> When the input power supply is normal, replace the servo amplifier.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
121
(3) Abnormal PN power supply

(a) Presumed cause

The servo amplifier input voltage drops, resulting in insufficient line capacity.

(b) Investigation/corrective action

<1> Check the servo amplifier input AC voltage.


(If 200 VAC varies due to noise etc, check the electrical continuity and
output voltage of LF120, NFB120, MC120, MC112, and LF1 and also
check the input line voltage of the system.)

<2> When the input power supply is normal, replace the servo amplifier.

* The descriptions in <3> to <8> are the corrective actions for the problem
where MC120 is turned ON.

<3> Check whether the settings of SW120 (toggle switch) and MS120 (cover
switch) are correct.

→ If the settings are not correct, correct the settings and turn the gantry
power OFF and then ON.

<4> Check whether the thermal switch of the feedback resistor is operating.
(Check the electrical continuity of TGR1 and check whether the surface
temperature of the feedback resistor is extremely high (more than
85°C).)

→ When heat generation of the feedback resistor is normal and there is


no electrical continuity in TGR1, replace TGR1.

→ When the feedback resistor is heated abnormally, check the cable


between R120 through R125 and TB120.
When the cable connections are normal, replace R120 to R125.

<5> Check whether CNN119 is disconnected.

<6> Check the electrical continuity between pins 1 and 2 of CNN119 (TGM1
check).

→ If there is no electrical continuity, contact Nasu Operations.

<7> Check whether F121 is not tripped.

<8> If the problem is still not corrected by measures <3> to <7>, check the
electrical continuity of FCP39. When there is electrical continuity,
replace the KGTSP PWB.

No. 2D201-063E*E
122
(4) Excessive heating of the feedback resistor, abnormal feedback resistor

(a) Presumed cause

The amount of heat generation from the feedback resistor exceeds the
specified value.

(b) Investigation/corrective actions

<1> Check whether connections on the terminal board to PA/JP1 of the servo
amplifier are correct.

→ If the connections are not correct, correct them.

<2> Check whether acceleration and deceleration of 0.5-s rotations were not
repeated excessively (5 times or more) during maintenance.

→ In this case, the system can be recovered by turning the gantry power
OFF and then ON again.

<3> Check the cable connections of the feedback resistor (R120 to R125 and
TB120).

→ If the cable connections are not correct, correct them.

(5) Instruction value counter over, present value counter over, abnormal deviation
counter, abnormal parameter, abnormal hardware in the servo amplifier, "Not
defined" error

(a) Presumed cause

Abnormal hardware circuit in the servo amplifier

(b) Investigation and/or corrective action

<1> Replace the servo amplifier

(6) During braking

(a) Presumed cause

There is no electrical continuity at the auxiliary contact of MC121.

(b) Investigation/corrective action

<1> Check whether the connections on the terminal board to NI1 and BI2 of
the servo amplifier are correct.

→ If the connections are not correct, correct them.

<2> Check the electrical continuity at MC121 (between pins 23 and 24).
When MC121 is ON → The contact must close.
When MC121 is OFF → The contact must open.
If the contact operation is abnormal when MC121 is turned ON and OFF,
replace MC121.

<3> If the error is still not corrected by <1> and <2>, replace the servo
amplifier.

No. 2D201-063E*E
123
(7) Speed amplifier saturation

(a) Presumed cause

The DD motor cannot rotate at a correct speed.

(b) Investigation/corrective action

<1> Check whether the rotation lock pin is not engaged.

<2> Check whether the cables between the motor and the servo amplifier are
connected correctly.

→ If they are not connected correctly, connect them correctly.

<3> Check whether the MR sensor connector CN2 is not disconnected.


(If this connector is disconnected, the DD motor rotates in the reverse
direction.)

<4> Check whether the MR sensor connector CN1 is not disconnected.

<5> Check the electrical continuity of FCS51 (between CN5 of the servo
amplifier and CN4 of the MR sensor).

→ If the FSC51 cable is not connected as shown in the connection


diagram or if a section is disconnected, replace the FCS51 cable.

<6> Check the rotation balance, and adjust the rotation balance as required.

<7> Check the accuracy of the MR sensor output pulse referring to


subsection 7.8 "Procedures for Adjusting the MR Sensor and the MR
Sensor PWB".

→ If the accuracy exceeds the specified value, adjust the MR sensor.

→ If MR sensor adjustment cannot obtain the specified accuracy,


replace the MR sensor and the MR sensor PWB.

* After they are replaced, adjustment is required. For the adjustment


procedures, refer to subsection 7.8 "Procedures for Adjusting the MR
Sensor and the MR Sensor PWB".

<8> If the error is still not corrected by procedures <1> to <7>, replace the
servo amplifier.

<9> If this error continues to occur after the servo amplifier is replaced,
contact Nasu Operations.

No. 2D201-063E*E
124
(8) Excessive heating of the motor

(a) Presumed cause

Excessive load, excessively short acceleration/deceleration interval

(b) Investigation/corrective actions

<1> Check whether acceleration and deceleration instructed from the


maintenance panel were not repeated excessively.

→ If the operation was repeated more than 4 or 5 times, recovery is


possible by increasing the constant speed rotation time and rotation
pause time.

<2> Check the rotation balance. Adjust the balance as required.

(9) Short-time overload

(a) Presumed cause

The motor output current exceeds the rated value.

(b) Investigation/corrective actions

<1> Check whether the rotation lock pin is not engaged.

<2> If this error occurs even when the rotation lock pin is not engaged,
replace the servo amplifier.

(10) Over speed

(a) Presumed cause

The gantry rotates at a speed of more than 120% of the maximum rotation
speed (as a detected value).

(b) Investigation/corrective actions

<1> Check the accuracy of the MR sensor output pulse referring to


subsection 7.8 "Procedures for Adjusting the MR sensor and the MR
sensor PWB".

→ If the accuracy exceeds the specified value, adjust the MR sensor.

→ If MR sensor adjustment cannot obtain the specified accuracy,


replace the MR sensor and the MR sensor PWB.

* After they are replaced, adjustment is required. For the adjustment


procedures, refer to subsection 7.8 "Procedures for Adjusting the MR
Sensor and the MR Sensor PWB".

<2> If the error is still not corrected by performing the procedures described
in <1>, replace the servo amplifier.

No. 2D201-063E*E
125
(11) Encoder disconnection error, encoder initialization error

(a) Presumed cause

No output signals from the MR sensor are input.

(b) Investigation/corrective action

<1> Check whether MR sensor power cable CN5 is connected.

<2> Check whether 5 VDC is applied between pins 1 and 2 of CN5.

<3> Check whether servo amplifier connector CN5 is connected.

<4> Check FCS51 for electrical continuity (between CN5 of the servo
amplifier and CN4 of the MR sensor).

→ If cable connection is not as shown in the connection diagram or if a


section is disconnected, replace the FCS51 cable.

<5> If the error is still not corrected by procedures <1> to <4>, replace the
MR sensor and the MR sensor PWB.

* After they are replaced, adjustment is required. For the adjustment


procedures, refer to subsection 7.8 "Procedures for Adjusting the MR
Sensor and the MR Sensor PWB".

<6> If the error continues to occur after the MR sensor and the MR sensor
PWB are replaced, replace the servo amplifier.

(12) Speed error (only the message on the KGTSM PWB)

(a) Presumed cause

The gantry rotates at a speed exceeding ±3% of the instructed speed.

(b) Investigation/corrective action

<1> Confirm that all settings of DIP switch DSW12 on the KGTSM PWB are
OFF.

<2> Check the accuracy of the MR sensor output pulse referring to


subsection 7.8 "Procedures for Adjusting the MR Sensor and the MR
Sensor PWB".

→ If the accuracy exceeds the specified value, adjust the MR sensor.

→ If MR sensor adjustment cannot obtain the specified accuracy,


replace the MR sensor and the MR sensor PWB.

* After they are replaced, adjustment is required. For the adjustment


procedures, refer to subsection 7.8 "Procedures for Adjusting the MR
Sensor and the MR Sensor PWB".

<3> If the error is still not corrected by performing the procedures described
in <1> and <2>, replace the servo amplifier.

No. 2D201-063E*E
126
(13) Overshooting error (only the message on the KGTSM PWB)

(a) Presumed cause

The current in the servo amplifier increases when the gantry is not rotating.

(b) Investigation/corrective action

<1> Check the rotation balance. Adjust the balance as required.

<2> Check the accuracy of the MR sensor output pulse referring to


subsection 7.8 "Procedures for Adjusting the MR Sensor and the MR
Sensor PWB".

→ If the accuracy exceeds the specified value, adjust the MR sensor.

→ If MR sensor adjustment cannot obtain the specified accuracy,


replace the MR sensor and the MR sensor PWB.

* After they are replaced, adjustment is required. For the adjustment


procedures, refer to subsection 7.8 "Procedures for Adjusting the MR
Sensor and the MR Sensor PWB".

<3> If the error is still not corrected by performing the procedures described
in <1> and <2>, replace the servo amplifier.

(14) Z phase (sensor) not being input (only the message on the KGSTM PWB)

(a) Presumed cause

No position sensor signals are input.

(b) Investigation/corrective action

<1> Check whether the position sensor cable is connected correctly.

→ If the cable connection is not correct, connect the cable correctly.

<2> Check whether LED40 on the KGTSM PWB lights for every gantry
rotation.

→ When the LED lights


Check the following position sensor lines for electrical continuity.

Between CN433-18 of the KGTSM PWB and CN5-14 of the servo


amplifier
Between CN433-19 of the KGTSM PWB and CN5-15 of the servo
amplifier

If there is no electrical continuity, replace FCS50 or FCS51 according


to the check result.
Otherwise, replace the KGTSM PWB.

→ When the LED does not light


Replace the position sensor or position sensor cable FCS07.

No. 2D201-063E*E
127
(15) Abnormal positioning (only the message on the KGTSM PWB)

(a) Presumed cause

The gantry stops at a position exceeding ±1° of the specified stop position.

(b) Investigation/corrective action

<1> Check the rotation balance. Adjust the balance as required.

<2> Check the accuracy of the MR sensor output pulse referring to


subsection 7.8 "Procedures for Adjusting the MR Sensor and the MR
Sensor PWB".

→ If the accuracy exceeds the specified value, adjust the MR sensor.

→ If MR sensor adjustment is helpless to obtain the specified accuracy,


replace the MR sensor and the MR sensor PWB.

* After they are replaced, adjustment is required. For the adjustment


procedures, refer to subsection 7.8 "Procedures for Adjusting the MR
Sensor and the MR Sensor PWB".

<3> If the error is still not corrected by performing the procedures described
in <1> and <2>, replace the servo amplifier.

(16) When a communication error occurs (ROTE: ACK/NAK receive over time)

(a) Presumed cause

Communication between the KGTSM PWB and the servo amplifier cannot be
performed.

(b) Investigation/corrective action

<1> Check whether rotation breaker NFB120 is not set to OFF.

<2> Check whether fuse F120 is not tripped.

<3> Check between the following cables for electrical continuity.

Between CN433-16 of the KGTSM PWB and CN13-5 of the servo


amplifier
Between CN433-17 of the KGTSM PWB and CN13-6 of the servo
amplifier
Between CN433-5 of the KGTSM PWB and CN13-7 of the servo
amplifier
Between CN433-6 of the KGTSM PWB and CN13-8 of the servo
amplifier

If there is no electrical continuity, replace FCS50 or FCS51.


Otherwise, replace the KGTSM PWB or the servo amplifier.

No. 2D201-063E*E
128
7.6.2 When the serial number is "S/N Bxxxxx"

7.6.2.1 Outline of operation

(1) Until gantry rotation is ready (refer to figure 7.6.2-1)

(a) When the power is turned ON (reset the KGTSM PWB), the initialization
sequence incorporated in the KGTSM PWB starts operating. The initialization
sequence turns ON the relay mounted on the KGTSM PWB, which sets
MC120 to ON and the main power is supplied to the servo amplifier.
(→ If the front cover is opened, a lamp lights.)

(b) The servo amplifier returns the ready signal to the KGTSM PWB after 3 to 5
seconds.

(c) When it is normal, this status is referred to as "the rotation enable status".
Manual rotation is only possible immediately after the power is turned ON.

(d) If an error has already occurred when the power is turned ON (or when the
KGTSM PWB is reset), the relay on the KGTSM PWB is OFF in step (b)
above and MC120 is also OFF. As a result, the main servo amplifier power is
also OFF.
(→ When the front cover is open, a lamp is extinguished.)

(2) Start of rotation

(a) When rotation is instructed from the console or the maintenance panel, the
KGTSM PWB outputs the servo ON signal to the servo amplifier. The servo
amplifier locks the DD motor (referred to as "servo lock") based on the servo
ON signal.
(An electrical brake is engaged and the DD motor cannot be rotated
manually.)

(b) After this, the gantry rotates at the rotation speed corresponding to the
instructed speed.

(3) Stoppage of rotation

(a) When stoppage of rotation is instructed from the console or the maintenance
panel, gantry rotation stops.

(b) After rotation has stopped, the servo lock status continues and therefore
manual rotation is impossible.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
129
(4) When an error occurs

(a) If an error occurs during rotation, the servo amplifier detects the error first.
(The gantry enters the servo free status and rotation stops spontaneously.)

(b) At the same time that the corresponding error code is displayed on the servo
amplifier monitor panel, the error message indicating the same error is
displayed on the KGTSM PWB.

(c) There are two types of errors: errors that can be corrected by pressing the OK
button on the console and errors requiring switching the gantry power supply
OFF and then ON.
(If an error requiring ON/OFF of the gantry power supply occurs, the KGTSM
PWB turns OFF the relay of the KGTSP PWB, resulting in OFF of MC120.)

KGTSM PWB

KGTSP PWB
10800 pulse
Relay ON
signal Servo ON signal
RY
SW120,MS220 Command
TGR1,TGM1
10800 pulse MR sensor
TGM2
system
Alarm

24 VDC MC120

DD motor
Servo amplifier
200 VAC Breaker

For motive power source

For the control PWB

Figure 7.6.2-1 Configuration of the gantry rotation system

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
130
7.6.2.2 Corrective measures against an error

* If an error occurs, first check that the peripheral cables of the servo amplifier, the DD
motor, and the MR sensor are connected correctly and that they are not
disconnected (after work in particular).

The message "Error in Gantry Rotation" is displayed on the console.

Was the
No
power turned OFF Check the contents with the error
and then ON again after message on the KGTSM PWB.
the error occurred?

Yes

Check the error code (error


history) on the servo amplifier.

Figure 7.6.2-2 Error message check flowchart in the case where an error occurs

* Speed errors, overshooting errors, Z-phase not being input errors, and abnormal
positioning errors are not displayed on the monitor panel on the servo amplifier side.
Only the error messages displayed on the KGTSM PWB are helpful to check these
errors.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
131
7.6.2.3 Presumed causes of errors, investigation, and countermeasures

(1) Overcurrent error (AL. 1)

(a) Presumed cause

Shorted cables between the DD motor and inside the servo amplifier,
malfunction of the parts inside the servo amplifier, abnormality in the photo
sensor system

(b) Investigation/countermeasures

<1> Check the connections of the cables between the DD motor and the
servo amplifier.

<2> Open the metal cap of the MR sensor and check pins CP11, CP12, and
CP13 using an oscilloscope (5 VDC). Note that CP9 is GND. After
setting the oscilloscope, turn ON the power of the gantry and manually
rotate the gantry. When pulse waves are displayed on the oscilloscope,
the system is normal.

<3> If pulse waves are not displayed on the oscilloscope, exchange the
photo sensors (PHC22-U, PHC23-V, PHC24-W) to identify whether a
photo sensor is defective or the cable FCS52 is defective.

<4> If the cable is defective, replace cable FCS52. If a photo sensor is


defective, replace the photo sensor ASSY (three photo sensors are
mounted on a metal plate).

<5> When pulse waves are displayed on the oscilloscope, the MR sensor
PWB or cable FCS51 may be defective. Perform a continuity check for
cable FCS51 (between CN4 of the MR sensor and CN5 of the servo
amplifier).

<6> When the above check indicates that there is no discontinuity, replace
the MR sensor PWB. If the error is still not corrected, replace the servo
amplifier.

(2) Overvoltage error (AL. 2)

(a) Presumed cause

Abnormal power supply input to the servo amplifier, disconnection of the


feedback resistor cable

(b) Investigation/countermeasures

<1> Check the servo amplifier input AC voltage.


(If 200 VAC varies due to noise etc, check the electrical continuity and
output voltage of LF120, NFB120, MC120, MC112, and LF1 and also
check the input line voltage of the system.)

<2> Confirm that PA and JP1 on TB2 of the servo amplifier are not
disconnected.

<3> When the input power supply is normal, replace the servo amplifier.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
132
(3) Abnormal PN power supply (AL. 3)

(a) Presumed cause

The servo amplifier input voltage drops, resulting in insufficient line capacity.
Phase T of the servo amplifier power supply is missing.

(b) Investigation/corrective action

<1> Check the servo amplifier input AC voltage.


(If 200 VAC varies due to noise etc, check the electrical continuity and
output voltage of LF120, NFB120, MC120, MC112, and LF1 and also
check the input line voltage of the system.)

<2> Confirm that 200 VAC is input between R and T and between S and T of
the servo amplifier input power supply.

<3> When the input power supply is normal, replace the servo amplifier.

(4) Abnormal main power supply input (AL. 4)

(a) Presumed cause

There was a drop in the servo amplifier input voltage during servo lock
(rotation stop) or rotation.

(b) Investigation/corrective actions

<1> Check the servo amplifier input AC voltage.

* The descriptions in <2> to <8> are the corrective actions for the problem
where MC120 is turned ON.

<2> Check whether the settings of SW120 (toggle switch) and MS120 (cover
switch) are correct.

→ If the settings are not correct, correct the settings and turn the gantry
power OFF and then ON.

<3> Confirm that P1 and P2 of servo amplifier shorting cable TB1 are
connected.

<4> Check whether the thermal switch of the feedback resistor is operating.
(Check the electrical continuity of TGR1 and check whether the surface
temperature of the feedback resistor is extremely high (more than
85°C).)

→ When heat generation of the feedback resistor is normal and there is


no electrical continuity in TGR1, replace TGR1.

→ When the feedback resistor is heated abnormally, check the cables


between R120 through R131 and TB120 and TB121.
When the cable connections are normal, replace R120 through R131.

<5> Check whether CNN119 is disconnected.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
133
<6> Check the electrical continuity between pins 1 and 2 of CNN119 (TGM1
and TGM2 check).

→ If there is no electrical continuity, contact Nasu Operations.

<7> Check whether F121 is not tripped.

<8> If the problem is still not corrected by measures <2> to <7>, check the
electrical continuity of FCP39. When there is electrical continuity,
replace the KGTSP PWB.

(5) Servo amplifier overheating (AL. 8)

(a) Presumed cause

Malfunction of the control PWB in the servo amplifier, malfunction of the


cooling fan in the servo amplifier

(b) Investigation/corrective actions

Replace the servo amplifier.

(6) Excessive heating of the feedback resistor

(a) Presumed cause

Abnormal feedback resistor in the servo amplifier (Though this system uses
no feedback resistor in the servo amplifier, this alarm message may be
displayed.)

(b) Investigation/corrective actions

Replace the servo amplifier.

(7) Abnormal feedback resistor (AL. 10)

(a) Presumed cause

The amount of heat generation from the feedback resistor exceeds the
specified value.

(b) Investigation/corrective actions

<1> Check whether connections on the terminal board to PA/JP1 of the servo
amplifier are correct.

→ If the connections are not correct, correct them.

<2> Check whether acceleration and deceleration of 0.5-s rotations were not
repeated excessively (5 times or more) during maintenance.

→ In this case, the system can be recovered by turning the gantry power
OFF and then ON again.

<3> Check the cable connections of the feedback resistor (R120 to R131 and
TB120, TB121).

→ If the cable connections are not correct, correct them.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
134
<4> Check the resistance between PA and JP2 of TB2 of the servo amplifier
with the power supply turned OFF (approximately 10 Ω, acceptable
range: 6 Ω to 20 Ω). If the result exceeds 20 Ω, replace feedback
resistors R120 to R131.

(8) Abnormal hardware in the servo amplifier, "Not defined" error, abnormality during
braking (AL. 14), abnormal deviation counter (AL. 21)

(a) Presumed cause

Abnormal hardware circuit in the servo amplifier

(b) Investigation and/or corrective action

<1> Replace the servo amplifier

(9) Overcurrent (AL. 15)

(a) Presumed cause

The motor was locked during rotation. Shorting of the motor cable. Phase
missing. The motor current exceeded 120% of the electric current limit.

(b) Investigation/corrective actions

<1> Confirm that the rotation lock pin is not engaged.

<2> Confirm that phase B and phase C (TB250) of the motor are not
disconnected.

<3> If the above checks reveal no problems, replace the servo amplifier.

(10) Speed amplifier saturation (AL. 16)

(a) Presumed cause

The DD motor cannot rotate at a correct speed.

(b) Investigation/corrective action

<1> Check whether the rotation lock pin is not engaged.

<2> Check whether the cables between the motor and the servo amplifier are
connected correctly. (TB250, servo amplifier TB3)

→ If they are not connected correctly, connect them correctly.

<3> Check whether the MR sensor connector CN2 is not disconnected.

<4> Check whether the MR sensor connector CN1 is not disconnected.

<5> Confirm that photo sensors PHC22-U, PHC23-V, and PHC24-W are not
disconnected and that their connection positions are not interchanged.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
135
<6> Check the electrical continuity of FCS51 (between CN5 of the servo
amplifier and CN4 of the MR sensor).

→ If the FSC51 cable is not connected as shown in the connection


diagram or if a section is disconnected, replace the FCS51 cable.

<7> Check the rotation balance, and adjust the rotation balance as required.

<8> Check the accuracy of the MR sensor output pulse referring to


"Procedures for Adjusting the MR Sensor and the MR Sensor PWB".

→ If the accuracy exceeds the specified value, adjust the MR sensor.

→ If MR sensor adjustment cannot obtain the specified accuracy,


replace the MR sensor and the MR sensor PWB.

* After they are replaced, adjustment is required. For the adjustment


procedures, refer to "Procedures for Adjusting the MR Sensor and the
MR Sensor PWB".

<9> If the error is still not corrected by procedures <1> to <8>, replace the
servo amplifier.

<10> If this error continues to occur after the servo amplifier is replaced,
contact Nasu Operations.

(11) Excessive heating of the motor (AL. 17)

(a) Presumed cause

Excessive load, excessively short acceleration/deceleration interval

(b) Investigation/corrective actions

<1> Check whether acceleration and deceleration instructed from the


maintenance panel were not repeated excessively.

→ If the operation was repeated more than 4 or 5 times with 0.5-second


rotation, recovery is possible by increasing the constant speed
rotation time and rotation pause time.

<2> Check the rotation balance. Adjust the balance as required.

(12) Short-time overload (AL. 18)

(a) Presumed cause

The motor output current exceeds the rated value.

(b) Investigation/corrective actions

<1> Check whether the rotation lock pin is not engaged.

<2> If this error occurs even when the rotation lock pin is not engaged,
replace the servo amplifier.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
136
(13) Over speed (AL. 20)

(a) Presumed cause

The gantry rotates at a speed of more than 120% of the maximum rotation
speed (as a detected value).

(b) Investigation/corrective actions

<1> Check the accuracy of the MR sensor output pulse referring to


"Procedures for Adjusting the MR sensor and the MR sensor PWB".

→ If the accuracy exceeds the specified value, adjust the MR sensor.

→ If MR sensor adjustment cannot obtain the specified accuracy,


replace the MR sensor and the MR sensor PWB.

* After they are replaced, adjustment is required. For the adjustment


procedures, refer to "Procedures for Adjusting the MR Sensor and the
MR Sensor PWB".

<2> If the error is still not corrected by performing the procedures described
in <1>, replace the servo amplifier.

(14) Encoder disconnection error (AL. 40)

(a) Presumed cause

No output signals from the MR sensor are input.

(b) Investigation/corrective action

<1> Check whether MR sensor power cable CN5 is connected.

<2> Check whether 5 VDC is applied between pins 1 and 2 of CN5.

<3> Check whether servo amplifier connector CN5 is connected.

<4> Check FCS51 for electrical continuity (between CN5 of the servo
amplifier and CN4 of the MR sensor).

→ If cable connection is not as shown in the connection diagram or if a


section is disconnected, replace the FCS51 cable.

<5> If the error is still not corrected by procedures <1> to <4>, replace the
MR sensor and the MR sensor PWB.

* After they are replaced, adjustment is required. For the adjustment


procedures, refer to "Procedures for Adjusting the MR Sensor and the
MR Sensor PWB".

<6> If the error continues to occur after the MR sensor and the MR sensor
PWB are replaced, replace the servo amplifier.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
137
(15) Abnormal encoder phase (AL. 49)

(a) Presumed cause

A phase of the position sensor is abnormal.

(b) Investigation/corrective actions

<1> Confirm that the position sensor cable is connected correctly.

→ If it is not, reconnect it correctly.

<2> Confirm that LED40 on the KGTSM PWB lights each time the gantry
rotates.

→ When the LED lights correctly

Check the continuity of the position sensor line (between the KGTSM
and the servo amplifier).

CN433-18 and CN5-14


CN433-19 and CN5-15

When there is a discontinuity, replace FCS50 or FCS51.


When there is no discontinuity, replace the KGTSM.

→ When the LED does not light correctly

Replace the position sensor or the position sensor cable (FCS07).

(16) Speed error (only the message on the KGTSM PWB)

(a) Presumed cause

The gantry rotates at a speed exceeding ±3% of the instructed speed.

(b) Investigation/corrective action

<1> Confirm that all settings of DIP switch DSW12 on the KGTSM PWB are
OFF.

<2> Check the accuracy of the MR sensor output pulse referring to


"Procedures for Adjusting the MR Sensor and the MR Sensor PWB".

→ If the accuracy exceeds the specified value, adjust the MR sensor.

→ If MR sensor adjustment cannot obtain the specified accuracy,


replace the MR sensor and the MR sensor PWB.

* After they are replaced, adjustment is required. For the adjustment


procedures, refer to "Procedures for Adjusting the MR Sensor and the
MR Sensor PWB".

<3> If the error is still not corrected by performing the procedures described
in <1> and <2>, replace the servo amplifier.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
138
(17) Overshooting error (only the message on the KGTSM PWB)

(a) Presumed cause

The current in the servo amplifier increases when the gantry is not rotating.

(b) Investigation/corrective action

<1> Confirm that all settings of DIP switch DSW12 on the KGTSM PWB are
OFF.

<2> Check the accuracy of the MR sensor output pulse referring to


"Procedures for Adjusting the MR Sensor and the MR Sensor PWB".

→ If the accuracy exceeds the specified value, adjust the MR sensor.

→ If MR sensor adjustment cannot obtain the specified accuracy,


replace the MR sensor and the MR sensor PWB.

* After they are replaced, adjustment is required. For the adjustment


procedures, refer to "Procedures for Adjusting the MR Sensor and the
MR Sensor PWB".

<3> If the error is still not corrected by performing the procedures described
in <1> and <2>, replace the servo amplifier.

(18) Z phase (sensor) not being input (only the message on the KGSTM PWB)

(a) Presumed cause

No position sensor signals are input.

(b) Investigation/corrective action

<1> Check whether the position sensor cable is connected correctly.

→ If the cable connection is not correct, connect the cable correctly.

<2> Check whether LED40 on the KGTSM PWB lights for every gantry
rotation.

→ When the LED lights


Check the following position sensor lines for electrical continuity.

Between CN433-18 of the KGTSM PWB and CN5-14 of the servo


amplifier
Between CN433-19 of the KGTSM PWB and CN5-15 of the servo
amplifier

If there is no electrical continuity, replace FCS50 or FCS51 according


to the check result.
Otherwise, replace the KGTSM PWB.

→ When the LED does not light


Replace the position sensor or position sensor cable FCS07.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
139
(19) Abnormal positioning (only the message on the KGTSM PWB)

(a) Presumed cause

The gantry stops at a position exceeding ±1° of the specified stop position.

(b) Investigation/corrective action

<1> Check the rotation balance. Adjust the balance as required.

<2> Check the accuracy of the MR sensor output pulse referring to


"Procedures for Adjusting the MR Sensor and the MR Sensor PWB".

→ If the accuracy exceeds the specified value, adjust the MR sensor.

→ If MR sensor adjustment is helpless to obtain the specified accuracy,


replace the MR sensor and the MR sensor PWB.

* After they are replaced, adjustment is required. For the adjustment


procedures, refer to "Procedures for Adjusting the MR Sensor and the
MR Sensor PWB".

<3> If the error is still not corrected by performing the procedures described
in <1> and <2>, replace the servo amplifier.

(20) When a communication error occurs (ROTE: ACK/NAK receive over time)

(a) Presumed cause

Communication between the KGTSM PWB and the servo amplifier cannot be
performed.

(b) Investigation/corrective action

<1> Check whether rotation breaker NFB120 is not set to OFF.

<2> Check whether fuse F120 is not tripped.

<3> Check between the following cables for electrical continuity.

Between CN433-16 of the KGTSM PWB and CN14-3 of the servo


amplifier
Between CN433-17 of the KGTSM PWB and CN14-4 of the servo
amplifier
Between CN433-5 of the KGTSM PWB and CN14-1 of the servo
amplifier
Between CN433-6 of the KGTSM PWB and CN14-2 of the servo
amplifier

If there is no electrical continuity, replace FCS50 or FCS51.


Otherwise, replace the KGTSM PWB or the servo amplifier.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
140
7.7 Procedures for Replacing the MR Sensor and the MR
Sensor PWB
7.7.1 When the serial number is "S/N Axxxxx"

(1) Pull out the gantry rear cover (or remove it).

(2) Remove the maintenance window plate shown in figure 7.7.1-1. Remove the M8
MUDAT external cover securing screws through the hole from which the window
plate was removed and through the section-A hole in the R-MUDAT in order to
remove the MUDAT external cover.

MUDAT external cover

MR sensor
MR sensor PWB
Section-A
hole

Figure 7.7.1-1 Replacing the MR sensor and the MR sensor PWB

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
141
(3) Move the section-A hole position until it reaches the MR sensor position (figure
7.7.1-2), remove the MR sensor securing screw through this hole, and remove the
MR sensor from the gantry. (Care must be taken not to drop the screw.)

Section-A hole

Figure 7.7.1-2 Moving the section-A hole

(4) Disconnect the connector from the MR sensor PWB and remove the MR sensor
PWB from the gantry.

(5) Mount the replacement parts by reversing the removal procedures described in (3)
and (4).

(6) Adjust the clearance between the gear and the MR sensor to 1 mm ±0.5 mm.

(a) Place a 1-mm thick plate (a plastic plate is recommended to prevent the MR
sensor surface from being damaged) between the gear and the MR sensor
with a size permitting the plate to be entered from the MUDAT external cover
(figure 7.7.1-3).

(b) In the status in (a) above, tighten the MR sensor securing screw.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
142
(c) Gently remove the 1-mm thick plate with great care not to damage the MR
sensor surface.

1-mm thick plate


(a plastic plate is recommended)

MR sensor

Curved edge of the gear

Figure 7.7.1-3 Adjusting the clearance between the gear and the MR sensor

(7) Check the rotation speed. (Use the speed data output from the KGTSM PWB for
this check).
For the check procedures, refer to subsection 7.4 "Gantry Rotation Speed Check
and Fine Adjustment Procedure".
If the rotation speed is outside the permissible range, adjust the rotation speed by
following the procedures described in subsection 7.8 "Procedures for Adjusting the
MR Sensor and the MR Sensor PWB".

(8) Remount the MUDAT external cover, the maintenance window plate, and the
gantry rear cover by reversing the removal procedures described in (1) and (2).

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
143
7.7.2 When the serial number is "S/N Bxxxxx"

(1) Pull out the gantry rear cover (or remove it).

(2) Remove the MUDAT external cover shown in figure 7.7.2-1.

MR sensor PWB
(M4 4)

Shim
(tightened together
with the MR sensor) MUDAT external cover
(M4 2)

MR sensor
(M4 2)

Figure 7.7.2-1 Replacing the MR sensor and the MR sensor PWB

(3) Remove the MR sensor.

When removing the MR sensor, be careful not to drop the screws and the shim
mounted together with the MR sensor.

The shim must be handled carefully because it is reused when the MR sensor is
remounted.

(4) Disconnect the connector from the MR sensor PWB and remove the MR sensor
PWB from the gantry.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
144
(5) Mount the replacement parts by reversing the removal procedures described in (3)
and (4).
When remounting the MR sensor, use the removed shim as is. The thickness of
the shim differs depending on the gantry. Do not change the factory adjustment of
the thickness.

(6) Check the rotation speed. (Use the speed data output from the KGTSM PWB for
this check).
For the check procedures, refer to subsection 7.4 "Gantry Rotation Speed Check
and Fine Adjustment Procedure".
If the rotation speed is outside the permissible range, adjust the rotation speed by
following the procedures described in subsection 7.8 "Procedures for Adjusting the
MR Sensor and the MR Sensor PWB".

(7) Remount the MUDAT external cover and the gantry rear cover by reversing the
removal procedures described in (1) and (2).

7.8 Procedures for Adjusting the MR Sensor and the MR


Sensor PWB
If vibration during rotation or sound during stoppage increases after some work is
performed, or if the speed data is abnormal after the MR sensor is replaced, MR sensor
adjustment may correct such problems.
The MR sensor adjustment procedures are described below.

7.8.1 When the serial number is "S/N Axxxxx"

7.8.1.1 Tools and instruments required

• Digital multimeter
• Alligator clips (they are convenient when the digital multimeter is connected to the
test pins)
• Clearance gauge (rated to measure a clearance of 1 mm)
• Precision screwdriver (for VR adjustment)
• Terminal for displaying the error messages from the KGTSM PWB

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
145
7.8.1.2 Adjustment procedures

(1) Turn OFF the gantry power and pull out the gantry rear cover.

(2) Remove the MUDAT external cover (TOP) at one location so that the MR sensor
can be accessed.

MUDAT external cover


MR sensor PWB

MR sensor

S-MUDAT

Rear side of the gantry

Figure 7.8.1-1 Access to the MR sensor

(3) Use the clearance gauge to confirm that the clearance between the MR sensor and
the gear is 1 mm ±0.5 mm.
If the clearance is outside the standard range (1 mm ±0.5 mm), adjust the
clearance by performing the procedures described in (6) of subsection 7.7.1
"Procedures for Replacing the MR Sensor and the MR Sensor PWB".

(4) Remove the MR sensor PWB cover located at the upper left of the gantry as
viewed from the rear of the gantry.

(5) Adjust phase A of the rotation pulse (refer to figure 7.8.1-2).

(a) Connect the digital multimeter to test pins CP1 (COM) and CP2 of the MR
sensor PWB. The settings must be AC range and effective value mode.

(b) Secure the digital multimeter to prevent it from being disconnected and turn
ON the gantry power.
-1
(c) Rotate the gantry at 30 min (rpm) (2 s) in maintenance mode from the
terminal connected to the KGTSM PWB.
-1
(If the gantry does not rotate by instruction at 30 min (rpm) rotation, rotation at
-1
1 min (rpm) (T-ROTA) is acceptable. If the gantry still does not rotate,
-1
manual operation (0.3 min (rpm) or more) is acceptable. Manual rotation
requires two people.)

(d) Adjust VR1 so that the digital multimeter reads a value between 0.31 V and
0.39 V (standard: 0.35 V).

(e) Stop gantry rotation.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
146
(f) Change the digital multimeter setting to DC range (still in effective value
mode).
-1
(g) Rotate the gantry at 30 min (rpm) by following the same procedures as in (c).

(h) Adjust VR3 so that the digital multimeter reads approximately 0 V.

(i) Stop gantry rotation and turn OFF the gantry power.

(6) Adjust phase B of the rotation pulse (refer to figure 7.8.1-2).

(a) Connect the digital multimeter to test pins CP1 (COM) and CP3 of the MR
sensor PWB. The settings must be AC range and effective value mode.

(b) Secure the digital multimeter to prevent it from being disconnected and turn
ON the gantry power.
-1
(c) Rotate the gantry at 30 min (rpm) by following the same procedures as in (c)
for phase A adjustment.

(d) Adjust VR2 so that the digital multimeter reads a value between 0.31 V and
0.39 V (standard: 0.35 V).

(e) Stop gantry rotation.

(f) Change the digital multimeter setting to DC range (still in effective value
mode).
-1
(g) Rotate the gantry at 30 min (rpm) by following the same procedures as in (c).

(h) Adjust VR4 so that the digital multimeter reads approximately 0 V.

(i) Stop gantry rotation and turn OFF the gantry power.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
147
VR4 VR3 VR2 VR1

CP3

CP1

CP2

Figure 7.8.1-2 Layout in the MR sensor PWB

(7) Disconnect the digital multimeter from the MR sensor and remount the covers to
their original positions.

(8) Perform gantry rotation (0.4 s, 0.5 s, 0.6 s, 0.75 s, 1.0 s, and 1.5 s) from the
maintenance panel and confirm that the speed check data on the KGTSM PWB is
correct.
Also confirm that the gantry rotates and stops without errors and that the noise
generated during stoppage of the gantry rotation does not increase.

* For the standards, refer to subsection 7.4 "Gantry Rotation Speed Check and
Fine Adjustment Procedure".

(9) Perform scanning from the console at each speed (5 scans for each of 0.4 s, 0.5 s,
0.6 s, 0.75 s, 1.0 s, and 1.5 s).

(10) Use DCA to check the gantry speed data regarding extra data.
Confirm that the speed data does not exceed the standards for all scans.
(DCA data is displayed in decimal notations. Therefore, it is recommended that the
data be converted to that in hexadecimal notations to check the maximum and
minimum values.)

* For the standards, refer to subsection 7.4 "Gantry Rotation Speed Check and
Fine Adjustment Procedure".

(11) If the gantry speed data value is outside the standard range, retry from (5).

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
148
7.8.2 When the serial number is "S/N Bxxxxx"

7.8.2.1 Tools and instruments required

• Digital multimeter
• Alligator clips (they are convenient when the digital multimeter is connected to the
test pins)
• Precision screwdriver (for VR adjustment)
• Terminal for displaying the error messages from the KGTSM PWB

7.8.2.2 Adjustment procedures

(1) Turn OFF the gantry power and pull out the gantry rear cover.

MUDAT external cover


MR sensor PWB

MR sensor

S-MUDAT

Rear side of the gantry

Figure 7.8.2-1 Access to the MR sensor

* The gap between the MR sensor and the slit plate is uniquely determined
according to the mounting plate and shim mounted at the factory. Therefore,
adjustment is not required.

(2) Remove the MR sensor PWB cover located at the upper left of the gantry as
viewed from the rear of the gantry.

(3) Adjust phase A of the rotation pulse.

(a) Connect the digital multimeter to test pins CP1 (COM) and CP2 of the MR
sensor PWB. The settings must be AC range and effective value mode.

(b) Secure the digital multimeter to prevent it from being disconnected and turn
ON the gantry power.
-1
(c) Rotate the gantry at 30 min (rpm) (2 s) in maintenance mode from the
terminal connected to the KGTSM PWB.
-1
(If the gantry does not rotate by instruction at 30 min (rpm) rotation, rotation at
-1
1 min (rpm) (T-ROTA) is acceptable. If the gantry still does not rotate,
-1
manual operation (0.3 min (rpm) or more) is acceptable. Manual rotation
requires two people.)

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
149
(d) Adjust VR1 so that the digital multimeter reads a value between 0.13 V and
0.15 V (standard: 0.14 V).

(e) Stop gantry rotation.

(f) Change the digital multimeter setting to DC range (still in effective value
mode).
-1
(g) Rotate the gantry at 30 min (rpm) by following the same procedures as in (c).

(h) Adjust VR3 so that the digital multimeter reads approximately 0 V.

(i) Stop gantry rotation and turn OFF the gantry power.

(4) Adjust phase B of the rotation pulse.

(a) Connect the digital multimeter to test pins CP1 (COM) and CP3 of the MR
sensor PWB. The settings must be AC range and effective value mode
(AVG).

(b) Secure the digital multimeter to prevent it from being disconnected and turn
ON the gantry power.
-1
(c) Rotate the gantry at 30 min (rpm) by following the same procedures as in (c)
for phase A adjustment.

(d) Adjust VR2 so that the digital multimeter reads a value between 0.13 V and
0.15 V (standard: 0.14 V).

(e) Stop gantry rotation.

(f) Change the digital multimeter setting to DC range (still in effective value
mode: AVG).
-1
(g) Rotate the gantry at 30 min (rpm) by following the same procedures as in (c).

(h) Adjust VR4 so that the digital multimeter reads approximately 0 V.

(i) Stop gantry rotation and turn OFF the gantry power.

(5) Disconnect the digital multimeter from the MR sensor and remount the covers to
their original positions.

(6) Perform gantry rotation (0.4 s, 0.5 s, 0.6 s, 0.75 s, 1.0 s, and 1.5 s) from the
maintenance panel and confirm that the speed check data on the KGTSM PWB is
correct.
Also confirm that the gantry rotates and stops without errors and that the noise
generated during stoppage of the gantry rotation does not increase.

* For the standards, refer to subsection 7.4 "Gantry Rotation Speed Check and
Fine Adjustment Procedure".

(7) Perform scanning from the console at each speed (5 scans for each of 0.4 s, 0.5 s,
0.6 s, 0.75 s, 1.0 s, and 1.5 s).

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
150
(8) Use DCA to check the gantry speed data regarding extra data.
Confirm that the speed data does not exceed the standards for all scans.

* For the standards, refer to subsection 7.4 "Gantry Rotation Speed Check and
Fine Adjustment Procedure".

(9) If the gantry speed data value is outside the standard range, retry from (3).

VR4 VR3 VR2 VR1

CP3
CP1
CP2
CP11(U)
CP12(V)
CP13(W)

Figure 7.8.2-2 Layout in the MR sensor PWB

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
151
7.9 Procedures for Replacing the Rotation Direction Photo
Sensor Unit
(1) Pull out the gantry rear cover (or remove it).

(2) Remove the MUDAT external cover shown in figure 7.9-1.

MUDAT external cover


(M4 2)
Spacer
(Mount this together
with the photo sensor.)

Photo sensor unit


(M4 2)

Figure 7.9-1 Replacing the rotation direction photo sensor unit

(3) Remove the photo sensor.

When removing the photo sensor, be careful not to drop the screws and the shim
mounted together with the photo sensor.

(4) Mount the replacement parts

When remounting the photo sensor, tighten the removed spacer together with the
photo sensor.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
152
(5) Check the rotation speed. (Use the speed data output from the KGTSM PWB for
this check).
For the check procedures, refer to subsection 7.4 "Gantry Rotation Speed Check
and Fine Adjustment Procedure".
If the rotation speed is outside the permissible range, adjust the rotation speed by
following the procedures described in subsection 7.8 "Procedures for Adjusting the
MR Sensor and the MR Sensor PWB".

(6) Remount the MUDAT external cover and the gantry rear cover by reversing the
removal procedures described in (1) and (2).

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
153
8. Adjustment Checks
8.1 Movement Range Setting Method for Couch Autoslide
(1) Description

The method for setting the movement range for couch autoslide on the KGTSM is
described here. Once the distances are set on the KGTSM, they will be
maintained by the KGTSM until rewritten.

(2) Caution

Even for units without the autoslide function, the movement range should be set at
310 mm.

<Tools required>

• PC

• Cables for servicing (standard GR-1)

• Programs: Hyper Terminal etc.

<Setting procedure>

1) Keep the power of the gantry OFF.

2) Connect CN404 of the KGTSM to the COM port of the PC using the service
cable.

3) Start Hyper Terminal on the PC.


(For the start-up procedures, refer to subsection 4.7 "Setting the Hyper
Terminal" of the installation manual (2C201-150E).)

4) Turn ON the power of the gantry and start the KGTSM.


(The seven segment LEDs will change from 00 → 88.)

• At the PC:

KGTSM boot V2.00


:
[GTS]

5) Set the autoslide values using the following procedure:

a) Press [Enter].

b) Input: auto [Enter]

autoslide move value:

c) Input a desired autoslide value:

If 310 mm 310 [Enter]


If 310.5 mm 310.5 [Enter]

No. 2D201-063E*E
154
d) The input value will be displayed:

autoslide move value XXX.X mm


are you sure? y/n:
To confirm the set value y [Enter]
To change the set value n [Enter] .........Operation is returned to step c).

e) When the setting is confirmed, the following display will appear:

*** H command preset data ***


autoslide = XXXX
0 clear time = YYYY

IN Limit - IN-1 = ZZ.Z mm, IN-1 - OUT2 = ZZZZ.Z mm


OUT2 - OUT1 = ZZ.Z mm, OUT1 - OUT Limit = ZZ.Z mm

XXXX: Indicates the couch autoslide distance.


(Indicator value x set value by 0.5 mm)

8.2 Setting the Zero-Clear Time for Couch Sliding


(1) Outline

It is necessary to keep the zero-clear switch pressed for a period of time to execute
zero-clear for couch sliding. The procedure for setting this time period is outlined
below.

<Tools required>

• PC

• Cables for service (standard GR-1)

• Programs: Hyper Terminal etc.

<Setting procedure>

1) Keep the gantry power OFF.

2) Connect CN404 of the KGTSM to the COM port of the PC using the service
cable.

3) Start Hyper Terminal on the PC.


(For the start-up procedures, refer to subsection 4.7 "Setting the Hyper
Terminal" of the installation manual (2C201-150E).)

4) Turn ON the power of the gantry and start the KGTSM.


(The seven segment LEDs will change from 00 → 88.)

• At the PC:

KGTSM boot V2.00


:
[GTS]

No. 2D201-063E*E
155
5) Set the zero-clear time in the following manner:

a) Press [Enter].

b) Input: ctm [Enter]

0 clear time value:

c) Input the zero-clear time:

If 2 seconds 20 [Enter]
If 2.5 seconds 25 [Enter]

d) The input value will be displayed:

0 clear time X.X (sec)


are you sure? y/n:
To confirm the input value y [Enter]
To change the input value n [Enter].........The operation will return to
step c).

e) When the setting is confirmed, the following display will appear:

*** H command preset data ***


autoslide = XXXX
0 clear time = YYYY

IN Limit - IN-1 = ZZ.Z mm, IN-1 - OUT2 = ZZZZ.Z mm


OUT2 - OUT1 = ZZ.Z mm, OUT1 - OUT Limit = ZZ.Z mm

YYYY: Indicates the 0-clear time (the value that was set above).

No. 2D201-063E*E
156
8.3 Procedure for Setting the Couch Horizontal Movement
Absolute Value Control Data
(1) Contents

The procedure for setting the distance between the couch slide sensors in the
KGTSM is described below. Once the value has been set for this item, the KGTSM
retains the value until it is changed.

<Tools required>

1) PC

2) Cable for service use (standard GR-1)

3) Hyper Terminal, etc.

<Setting procedure>

1) Turn OFF the power of the gantry.

2) Connect the cable for service use between CN404 of the KGTSM and the PC.

3) Start up Hyper Terminal from the PC.

4) Turn the gantry power ON and start up the KGTSM (the display on the
7-segment LED changes from 00 to 88).

• The following is displayed on the PC screen.

KGTSM boot V2.00


:
[GTS]

5) Follow the steps below to set the absolute value control data.

a) Press [Enter].

b) Enter slide [Enter].

1 -- CBTB-014A (IN Limit - IN-1: 50 mm, IN-1 - OUT2: 1463 mm,


OUT2 - OUT1: 237 mm, OUT1 - OUT Limit: 68 mm)

2 -- CBTB-016A (IN Limit - IN-1: 50 mm, IN-1 - OUT2: 1984 mm,


OUT2 - OUT1: 88 mm, OUT1 - OUT Limit: 68 mm)

3 -- CBTB-016B (IN Limit - IN-1: 50 mm, IN-1 - OUT2: 1684 mm,


OUT2 - OUT1: 88 mm, OUT1 - OUT Limit: 68 mm)

4 -- Selfpropelled (IN Limit - IN-1: 59 mm, IN-1 - OUT2: 1734 mm,


OUT2 - OUT1: 59 mm, OUT1 - OUT Limit: 68 mm)

5 -- Other type

Couch type select: (2)?

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*A
157
c) Enter the desired number.

To set data 1 : 1 [Enter]


To set data 2 : 2 [Enter]
To set data 3 : 3 [Enter]
To set data 4 : 4 [Enter]
To set data other than 1 to 4 : 5 [Enter]

d) The display differs depending on the number that was entered in step c).

If 1 is entered:

IN Limit - IN-1: 50.0 mm, IN-1 - OUT2: 1463.0 mm,


OUT2 - OUT1: 237.0 mm, OUT1 - OUT Limit: 68.0 mm
are you sure ? y/n:

To accept this data : y [Enter]


To reject this data : n [Enter].........The display returns to c).

If 2 is entered:

IN Limit - IN-1: 50.0 mm, IN-1 - OUT2: 1984.0 mm,


OUT2 - OUT1: 88.0 mm, OUT1 - OUT Limit: 68.0 mm
are you sure ? y/n:

To accept this data : y [Enter]


To reject this data : n [Enter].........The display returns to c).

If 3 is entered:

IN Limit - IN-1: 50.0 mm, IN-1 - OUT2: 1684.0 mm,


OUT2 - OUT1: 88.0 mm, OUT1 - OUT Limit: 68.0 mm
are you sure ? y/n:

To accept this data : y [Enter]


To reject this data : n [Enter].........The display returns to c).

If 4 is entered:

IN Limit - IN-1: 59.0 mm, IN-1 - OUT2: 1734.0 mm,


OUT2 - OUT1: 59.0 mm, OUT1 - OUT Limit: 68.0 mm
are you sure ? y/n:

To accept this data : y [Enter]


To reject this data : n [Enter].........The display returns to c).

No. 2D201-063E*E
158
If 5 is entered:

IN Limit - IN-1: (ZZZZ)?

(i) Enter the data for the distance between IN Limit and IN-1.

For 50 mm : 500 [Enter]


For 50.5 mm : 505 [Enter]
IN-1 - OUT2: (ZZZZ)?

(ii) Enter the data for the distance between IN-1 and OUT2.

For 1463 mm : 14630 [Enter]


For 1463.5 mm : 14635 [Enter]

(iii) Enter the data for the distance between OUT2 and OUT1.

For 237 mm : 2370 [Enter]


For 237.5 mm : 2375 [Enter]

(iv) Enter the data for the distance between OUT1 and OUT Limit.

For 68 mm : 680 [Enter]


For 68.5 mm : 685 [Enter]

IN Limit - IN-1: ZZ.Z mm, IN-1 - OUT2: ZZZZ.Z mm,


OUT2 - OUT1: ZZ.Z mm, OUT1 - OUT Limit: ZZ.Z mm
are you sure ? y/n:

To accept the above data: y [Enter]


To reject the above data : n [Enter] ......The display returns to c).

e) The following is displayed.

*** H command preset data ***


auto slide = XXXX
0 clear time = YYYY
IN Limit - IN-1 = ZZ.Z mm, IN-1 - OUT2 = ZZZZ.Z mm
OUT2 - OUT1 = ZZ.Z mm, OUT1 - OUT Limit = ZZ.Z mm
:

ZZZZ: Indicates the absolute control data (the displayed value is the
entered setting)

No. 2D201-063E*E
159
8.4 Couch-Top Sliding Fine Adjustment Function Setting
Procedure
(1) Contents

The procedure for setting the couch-top sliding fine adjustment to ON or OFF is
described below. Once the value has been set for this item, the KGTSM retains
the value until it is changed.

<Tools required>

1) PC

2) Cable for service use (standard GR-1)

3) Hyper Terminal, etc.

<Setting procedure>

1) Turn OFF the power of the gantry.

2) Connect the cable for service use between CN404 of the KGTSM and the PC.

3) Start up Hyper Terminal from the PC.

4) Turn the gantry power ON and start up the KGTSM (the display on the
7-segment LED changes from 00 to 88).

• The following is displayed on the PC screen.

KGTSM boot V2.00


:
[GTS]

5) Follow the steps below to perform setting.

a) Press [Enter]

b) Enter adj [Enter].

1 -- OFF 2 -- ON
Couch adjustment: (1)?

c) Enter the desired number.

To set the fine adjustment function to OFF : 1 [Enter]


To set the fine adjustment function to ON : 2 [Enter]

d) The following is displayed.

*** H command preset data ***


auto slide = XXXX
0 clear time = YYYY
IN Limit - IN-1 = ZZ.Z mm, IN-1 - OUT2 = ZZZZ.Z mm
OUT2 - OUT1 = ZZ.Z mm, OUT1 - OUT Limit = ZZ.Z mm
Couch adjustment = on or off
:

on or off: Indicates whether the fine adjustment function is enabled (on) or


disabled (off).

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*A
160
8.5 Footswitch Mode Selection Procedure (only for the patient
couch CBTB-016A or CBTB-016B)
(1) Contents

The procedure for selecting the couch footswitch mode is described below. Once
the value has been set for this item, the KGTSM retains the value until it is
changed.

<Tools required>

1) PC

2) Cable for service use (standard GR-1)

3) Hyper Terminal, etc.

<Setting procedure>

1) Turn OFF the power of the gantry.

2) Connect the cable for service use between CN404 of the KGTSM and the PC.

3) Start up Hyper Terminal from the PC.

4) Turn the gantry power ON and start up the KGTSM (the display on the
7-segment LED changes from 00 to 88).

• The following is displayed on the PC screen.

KGTSM boot V2.00


:
[GTS]

5) Follow the steps below to perform setting.

a) Press [Enter].

b) Enter fsw [Enter].

1 -- UP/DOWN 2 -- AUTO-SET/AUTO-HOME
preset foot sw mode: (1)?

c) Enter the desired number.

To set the footswitch mode to UP/DOWN : 1 [Enter]


To set the footswitch mode to AUTO-SET/AUTO-HOME : 2 [Enter]

d) The following is displayed.

*** H command preset data ***


auto slide = XXXX
0 clear time = YYYY
IN Limit - IN-1 = ZZ.Z mm, IN-1 - OUT2 = ZZZZ.Z mm
OUT2 - OUT1 = ZZ.Z mm, OUT1 - OUT Limit = ZZ.Z mm
Couch adjustment = on or off
Foot sw = up/down or auto-set/auto-home
:

up/down or auto-set/auto-home: Indicates the footswitch mode.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*A
161
8.6 Procedure for Setting the Couch Vertical Movement Stop
Position in Auto-Set Mode (only for the patient couch
CBTB-016A or CBTB-016B)
(1) Contents

The procedure for setting the couch upward movement stop position when couch
vertical movement is performed in Auto-set mode is described below. This stop
position setting is applicable only if the footswitch mode is set to "Auto-set/Auto-
home".

Once the value has been set for this item, the KGTSM retains the value until it is
changed.

<Tools required>

1) PC

2) Cable for service use (standard GR-1)

3) Hyper Terminal, etc.

<Setting procedure>

1) Turn OFF the power of the gantry.

2) Connect the cable for service use between CN404 of the KGTSM and the PC.

3) Start up Hyper Terminal from the PC.

4) Turn the gantry power ON and start up the KGTSM (the display on the
7-segment LED changes from 00 to 88).

• The following is displayed on the PC screen.

KGTSM boot V2.00


:
[GTS]

5) Follow the steps below to perform the setting.

a) Press [Enter].

b) Enter aset [Enter].

1 -- HEIGHT-1 2 -- HEIGHT-0.5
3 -- HEIGHT-0 4 -- UP-LIMIT
preset height stop position: (2)?

c) Enter the desired number.

To set the stop position to HEIGHT-1 : 1 [Enter]


To set the stop position to HEIGHT-0.5 : 2 [Enter]
To set the stop position to HEIGHT-0 : 3 [Enter]
To set the stop position to UP-LIMIT : 4 [Enter]

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*A
162
d) The following is displayed.

*** H command preset data ***


auto slide = XXXX
0 clear time = YYYY
IN Limit - IN-1 = ZZ.Z mm, IN-1 - OUT2 = ZZZZ.Z mm
OUT2 - OUT1 = ZZ.Z mm, OUT1 - OUT Limit = ZZ.Z mm
Couch adjustment = on or off
Foot sw = auto-set/auto-home
Height position = HEIGHT-0.5 or HEIGHT-1 or HEIGHT-0 or UP-Limit

HEIGHT-0.5 or HEIGHT-1 or HEIGHT-0 or UP-Limit: Indicates the stop


position that was set.

8.7 Adjustment of Couch Height Displays


(1) Outline

This subsection describes procedures to adjust the couch height data displayed on
the operator panel.

<Tools required>

• Screwdriver for adjustment

<Procedures to adjust the couch height data display>

1) Set bit 4 of DIP switch DSW4 on the KGTSM PWB to the ON position.

2) Move down the couch top to the HEIGHT-1 position.

Move the couch top 222 mm or more from the OUT LIMIT position (at the IN
position). The couch top stops at the HEIGHT-1 position.

3) Turn the control VR6 on the KGTSM PWB so that the display of couch height
data displays 0.

4) Move up the couch top to the UP LIMIT position.

5) Turn the control VR7 on the KGTSM PWB so that the display of couch height
data displays +190.

6) Set bit 4 of DIP switch DSW4 on the KGTSM PWB to the OFF position.

No. 2D201-063E*E
163
8.8 Adjustment of Projector Angle Display
(1) Outline

This subsection describes the procedures for adjusting the external projector angle
data displayed on the operator panel.

<Tools required>

• Screwdriver for adjustment

<Adjustment procedures>

1) Set bit 4 of DIP switch DSW4 to the ON position.

2) Set the projector angle to 0° and adjust VR4 on the KGTSM PWB so that the
angle display on the operator panel is 0°.

3) Set the projector angle to ±30° and adjust VR5 on the KGTSM PWB so that the
angle display on the operator panel is ±30°.

4) Return bit 4 of DIP switch DSW4 to the OFF position.

No. 2D201-063E*E
164
8.9 Checking the Couch Top Speed
<Tools required>

• Measuring tape

• Stopwatch

• Persons required for work: 2

<Work procedure>

1) Attach the measuring tape to the couch. Use tape to attach a cable tie to the couch
top as a measurement marker.

Attach a cable tie so that the scale of the


measuring tape can be used for measurement.

Measuring tape

* The couch top is moved farther inward than OUT2.


Be careful when attaching the cable tie and the measuring tape.

2) Perform operation at 10 mm/s or 130 mm/s from the operating panel.


(for the CBTB-016A or CBTB-016B)

Speed Amount of movement Measurement Limit


10 mm/s 340 mm (OUT) 300 mm 30 ± 0.5 s
340 mm (IN) 300 mm 30 ± 0.5 s
130 mm/s 600 mm (OUT) 390 mm 3 ± 0.5 s
600 mm (IN) 390 mm 3 ± 0.5 s

10 mm/s : Couch top speed when or is pressed

130 mm/s : Couch top speed when and are pressed together or
and are pressed together.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*A
165
3) Perform operation at 10 mm/s or 100 mm/s from the operating panel.
(for the CBTB-014A)

Speed Amount of movement Measurement Limit


10 mm/s 340 mm (OUT) 300 mm 30 ± 0.5 s
340 mm (IN) 300 mm 30 ± 0.5 s
100 mm/s 600 mm (OUT) 400 mm 4 ± 0.5 s
600 mm (IN) 400 mm 4 ± 0.5 s

10 mm/s : Couch top speed when or is pressed

100 mm/s : Couch top speed when and are pressed together or
and are pressed together.

4) The standard is only the approximate. The couch-top speed can be checked
precisely by performing helical scanning and checking the extra data for the
couch-top speed.

No. 2D201-063E*E
166
9. Miscellaneous
9.1 Checks and Adjustments After Parts Replacement
(KGTSM)
When the KGTSM PWB, the servo amplifier, and/or the servo motor are replaced, the
following checks and adjustments are required:

(1) KGTSM PWB

(a) Supply voltage check (5 V and ±15 V)

(b) Setting the amount of automatic couch slide (initially 310 mm), 0-clear time,
and the couch horizontal movement absolute value control data.

Foot SW mode setting (only for the CBTB-016A and CBTB-016B)

(c) Adjustment of couch height display (Fine adjustment)

9.2 Explanation of the System Setting Switches


9.2.1 DIP switch DSW4 on the KGTSM PWB

SW1 SW 2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW 7 SW8


ON
(Normal setting)
OFF

SW1 : ON = KGTSM mode


OFF = Test mode
SW2 : Not in use
SW3 : Not in use
SW4 : For couch height/tilt/projector adjustment (Usually OFF)
SW5 : For software test (Usually OFF)
SW6 : For DD motor communication (Usually OFF)
SW7 : Not in use
SW8 : Not in use

(1) SW1 (KGTSM mode/Test mode)

This switch should be set to ON when the system is used normally.

(2) SW4 (for couch height/tilt/projector adjustment)

ON : Displays the current couch height/tilt/projector angle value on the operator


panel. (This setting is used for display and adjustment.)

OFF : Displays data only when couch height, tilting and the projector are in
motion.

(3) SW5 (for software test)

Usually set to OFF

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*A
167
(4) SW6 (for DD motor communication)

ON : No communication with the DD motor.

OFF : Performs communication with the DD motor.

9.2.2 KGTSM PWB DIP switch DSW11 setting


(For TSX-101A/6)
SW 1 SW 2 SW3 SW 4 SW5 SW6 SW 7 SW 8
ON
OFF

(1) System settings

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8


OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF

No. 2D201-063E*E
168
9.3 Gantry X-ray Tube Position Information
The following X-ray tube position information is available:

(1) Gantry encoder data for rotation control

(a) The data can be seen under "X-ray-pos" in KGTSM status.

(b) Stop position of the gantry is controlled.

(c) The data is incremented for each gantry encoder pulse.

........... 10800 pulses per rotation

(2) Position information for 0.5-second rotation reconstruction

(a) The data can be seen on DCA 1 ch (0.5-s scan).

(b) The data shows the position of the X-ray tube for projection when scanning is
performed with 0.5-second rotation.

(c) The data increments by 1 for every 12 pulses of the gantry encoder.

........... 900 views per rotation

(3) Position information for 0.6-second rotation reconstruction

(a) The data can be seen on DCA 1 ch (0.6-s scan)

(b) The data shows the position of the X-ray tube for projection when scanning is
performed with 0.6-second rotation.

(c) The data increments by 1 for every 12 pulses of the gantry encoder.

........... 900 views per rotation

(4) Position information for 0.75-second rotation reconstruction

(a) The data can be seen on DCA 1 ch (0.75-s scan).

(b) The data shows the position of the X-ray tube for projection when scanning is
performed with 0.75-second rotation.

(c) The data increments by 1 for every 12 pulses of the gantry encoder.

........... 900 views per rotation

(5) Position information for 1-second rotation reconstruction

(a) The data can be seen on DCA 1 ch (1.0-s scan).

(b) The data shows the position of the X-ray tube for projection when scanning is
performed with 1-second rotation.

(c) The data increments by 1 for every 9 pulses of the gantry encoder.

........... 1200 views per rotation

No. 2D201-063E*E
169
(6) Position information for 1.5-second rotation reconstruction

(a) The data can be seen on DCA 1 ch (1.5 s scan).

(b) The data shows the position of the X-ray tube for projection when scanning is
performed with 1.5-second rotation.

(c) The data increments by 1 for every 6 pulses of the gantry encoder.

........... 1800 views per rotation

In the Aquilion, the above data is cleared (set to zero) when the tube position
is 120°.

0° A position pulse sensor is provided to detect


when the tube position is 120°. When this
sensor is triggered, the data is cleared.

120° Therefore, these data count up again after being


0-cleared at the tube position of 120 degrees.

Data is cleared to 0
at this tube position.

(7) Position information for 0.4-s rotation reconstruction

(a) The data can be seen on DCA 1 ch (0.4-s scan)

(b) The data shows the position of the X-ray tube for projection when scanning is
performed with 0.4-s rotation.

(c) The data increments by 1 for every 15 pulses of the gantry encoder.

........... 720 views per rotation

No. 2D201-063E*E
170
TUBE-TOP [0°]
Gantry encoder : 7200 = IC20 (H)
0.4-s reconstruction : 480 = 1E0 (H)
0.5, 0.6, 0.75-s reconstruction : 600 = 258 (H)
1.0-s reconstruction : 800 = 320 (H)
1.5-s reconstruction : 1200 = 4b0 (H)
The position pulse sensor is triggered
when the X-ray tube is at 120 degrees.
0° Gantry encoder pulse : 10800 PLS per rotation
0.4-s reconstruction : 720 views per rotation
0.5-s reconstruction : 900 views per rotation
0.6-s reconstruction : 900 views per rotation
0.75-s reconstruction : 900 views per rotation
1.0-s reconstruction : 1200 views per rotation
1.5-s reconstruction : 1800 views per rotation

TUBE-R-SIDE [90°]
TUBE-L-SIDE [270°] 120° Gantry encoder : 9900 = 26AC (H)
Gantry encoder : 4500 = 1194 (H) 270° 90 ° 0.4-s reconstruction : 660 = 294 (H)
0.4-s reconstruction : 300 = 12C (H) 0.5, 0.6, 0.75-s reconstruction : 825 = 339 (H)
0.5, 0.6, 0.75-s reconstruction : 375 = 177 (H) 1.0-s reconstruction : 1100 = 44C (H)
1.0-s reconstruction : 500 = 1F4 (H) 1.5-second reconstruction : 1650 = 672 (H)
1.5-s reconstruction : 750 = 2EE (H)

LAST DATA
Gantry encoder : 10799 = 2A2F (H)
0.4-s reconstruction : 719 = 2CF (H)
POSITION 0.5, 0.6, 0.75-s reconstruction : 899 = 383 (H)
PULSE 1.0-s reconstruction : 1199 = 4AF (H)
180 ° 1.5-second reconstruction : 1799 = 707 (H)

TUBE-BOTTOM [180°] START DATA [120°]


Gantry encoder : 1800 = 708 (H) Gantry encoder : 0 = 0 (H)
0.4-s reconstruction : 120 = 78 (H) 0.4-s reconstruction : 0 = 0 (H)
0.5, 0.6, 0.75-s reconstruction : 150 = 96 (H) 0.5, 0.6, 0.75-s reconstruction : 0 = 0 (H)
1.0-s reconstruction : 200 = C8 (H) 1.0-s reconstruction : 0 = 0 (H)
1.5-s reconstruction : 300 = 12c (H) 1.5-second reconstruction : 0 = 0 (H)

Gantry position data

No. 2D201-063E*E
171
9.4 Optical System Operation
9.4.1 Wedge operation

(1) Operation

(a) The wedge always returns to the reference position before it moves to the
specified position.

(b) The wedge does not move if the current position and the specified position are
the same.

(c) If the sensor position is at the reference position when the power is turned
ON, the wedge moves outside the sensor area once and then returns to the
sensor reference position before it moves to the target position.

(2) Function and position

Small : Sensor reference position


Large : 16.00 mm away from the reference position
DR : 32.00 mm away from the reference position

(3) Timeout error

In the following cases, a timeout error occurs.

(a) The wedge does not pass the reference position sensor within the specified
time (3 s).

(b) When the specified position is the reference position, the wedge does not
pass the reference position sensor before its movement is completed.

(c) When the specified position is other than the reference position, the wedge
passes the reference position sensor before its movement is completed.

9.4.2 Slit operation

(1) Operation

(a) The slit always returns to the reference position before it moves to the
specified position.

(b) The slit does not move if the current position and the specified position are the
same.

(c) If the sensor position is at the reference position when the power is turned
ON, the slit moves outside the sensor area once and then returns to the
sensor reference position before it moves to the target position.

No. 2D201-063E*E
172
(2) Function and position

Acquisition slice thickness Focus size Slit width


1 mm (0.5 mm × 2) Small 1.562 ±0.1 mm
2 mm (0.5 mm × 4) Small 1.959 ±0.1 mm
(1 mm × 2) Small 1.840 ±0.1 mm
Large 2.390 ±0.1 mm
3 mm (0.5 mm × 6) Small 2.351 ±0.1 mm
4 mm (0.5 mm × 8) Small 2.738 ±0.1 mm
(1 mm × 4) Small 2.622 ±0.1 mm
Large 3.159 ±0.1 mm
(2 mm × 2) Small 2.312 ±0.1 mm
Large 2.853 ±0.1 mm
5 mm (0.5 mm × 10) Small 3.121 ±0.1 mm
6 mm (0.5 mm × 10) Small 3.536 ±0.1 mm
(1 mm × 6) Small 3.423 ±0.1 mm
Large 3.946 ±0.1 mm
(3 mm × 2) Small 2.661 ±0.1 mm
Large 3.197 ±0.1 mm
7 mm (0.5 mm × 14) Small 3.909 ±0.1 mm
8 mm (0.5 mm × 16) Small 4.313 ±0.1 mm
(1 mm × 8) Small 4.203 ±0.1 mm
Large 4.747 ±0.1 mm
(2 mm × 4) Small 3.872 ±0.1 mm
Large 4.422 ±0.1 mm
(4 mm × 2) Large 3.574 ±0.1 mm
10 mm (1 mm × 10) Small 4.996 ±0.1 mm
Large 5.522 ±0.1 mm
12 mm (1 mm × 12) Small 5.764 ±0.1 mm
Large 6.306 ±0.1 mm
(2 mm × 6) Small 5.453 ±0.1 mm
Large 6.003 ±0.1 mm
(3 mm × 4) Small 4.996 ±0.1 mm
Large 5.557 ±0.1 mm
14 mm (1 mm × 14) Small 6.571 ±0.1 mm
Large 7.091 ±0.1 mm
16 mm (1 mm × 16) Small 7.346 ±0.1 mm
Large 7.875 ±0.1 mm
(2 mm × 8) Small 7.027 ±0.1 mm
Large 7.566 ±0.1 mm
(4 mm × 4) Large 6.735 ±0.1 mm
18 mm (3 mm × 6) Small 7.378 ±0.1 mm
Large 7.905 ±0.1 mm
20 mm (2 mm × 10) Small 8.592 ±0.1 mm
Large 9.135 ±0.1 mm

No. 2D201-063E*E
173
Acquisition slice thickness Focus size Slit width
24 mm (2 mm × 12) Small 10.177 ±0.1 mm
Large 10.722 ±0.1 mm
(3 mm × 8) Small 9.735 ±0.1 mm
Large 10.279 ±0.1 mm
(4 mm × 6) Large 9.893 ±0.1 mm
28 mm (2 mm × 14) Small 11.735 ±0.1 mm
Large 12.295 ±0.1 mm
32 mm (2 mm × 16) Small 13.309 ±0.1 mm
Large 13.862 ±0.1 mm
(4 mm × 8) Large 13.032 ±0.1 mm

(3) Timeout error

In the following cases, a timeout error occurs.

(a) The slit does not pass the reference position sensor within the specified time
(3 s).

(b) When the specified position is the reference position, the slit does not pass
the reference position sensor before its movement is completed.

(c) When the specified position is other than the reference position, the slit
passes the reference position sensor before its movement is completed.

No. 2D201-063E*E
174
9.5 Couch Slide Servo Amplifier (for the CBTB-016A/016B)
9.5.1 Outline of the couch horizontal movement section control

Servo feedback pulse (pulley axis)


2500 x 4 x 81 = 810000 P/R

Servo ON (SSERVOON)

1250 P/mm

Completion of positioning Servo amplifier


KGTSM
(SFINISH)

Servo alarm (SALARM)

Drive current Feedback pulse


16 P/mm

Motor encoder
(2500 P/R)

Encoder Brake/clutch Reducer Motor brake


Pulley (24 VDC) Motor
(4224 P/R) (1/81) (24 VDC)

(1) When the power is turned ON, the KGTSM turns ON the relay (on the KGTSP)
supplying 24 VDC to the brake and clutch during initialization and transmits the
servo ON signal to the slide servo amplifier.

NOTE: When 24 VDC is applied, the brake is released and the clutch is
connected.
At this time, if the servo amplifier detects an alarm signal, the message
"SLIDE: Servo Error" is displayed on the KGTSM.

(2) When sliding is instructed, the KGTSM transmits the instruction pulse to the servo
amplifier.

Instruction pulse: 1250 pulses/mm

Example: When the sliding distance is 600 mm, 1250 × 600 = 750,000 pulses are
transmitted.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*A
175
(3) The couch horizontal movement drive section has an encoder (2500
pulses/rotation) at the motor and the servo amplifier checks the feedback pulse to
confirm that operation is as specified by the instruction pulse from the KGTSM.

Feedback pulse: 2500 pulses/rotation

In the servo amplifier, this 2500 pulses/rotation is quadrupled and used. Therefore,
a 10,000-pulse feedback per motor-axis rotation is obtained.

Since the reduction ratio is 1/81, the total number of pulses per rotation of the
pulley (encoder) is

10,000 × 81 = 810,000.

When the diameter of the pulley is 84.03 mm, the feedback pulse per mm of
horizontal movement is calculated as follows:

810,000/84.03/3.14159 = 3068.32 pulses/mm

(4) The KGTSM uses the pulse signal from the encoder (4224 pulses/rotation)
mounted to the pulley axis to check the stop position and couch speed as well as
to generate a scanogram view trigger signal.

The encoder pulse per mm of horizontal movement is calculated in the same


manner as the above:

4224/84.03/3.14159 = 16 pulses/mm

(5) When horizontal movement by the distance specified from the KGTSM is
completed, the servo amplifier transmits the positioning completion signal
(SFINISH) to the KGTSM. If the KGTSM cannot recognize this positioning
completion signal when the movement instruction is issued again, a "SLIDE: Servo
Error" occurs.

(6) If the servo amplifier detects an alarm signal during movement (servo ON), it
transmits the alarm signal (SALARM) to the KGTSM. When the KGTSM
recognizes this alarm signal, a "SLIDE: Servo Error" occurs.

(7) When the KGTSM detects a Servo Error, it sets the brake power (24 VDC) relay to
OFF. As a result, the brake is engaged and horizontal movement is disabled. In
this status, if sliding is instructed, the error message "SLIDE: Can't to move" is
displayed.

In this status, if the IN/OUT switch on the operating panel is held down, the panel
display blinks and the KGTSM continues to display the above message. Due to
the restrictions on movement control, the "100-ms interval error" may occur at
certain timings and the drive system power supplies, including those for tilting and
vertical movement, may be interrupted.

No. 2D201-063E*E
176
9.5.2 Action to be taken when a slide servo error occurs

For the CBTB-016A or CBTB-016B, identify the error by checking the blinking interval of
the LEDs on the applicable alarm panel. Alternatively, connect a PC to the slide servo
amplifier to check the contents of the alarm.

Method for identifying the contents of the generated alarm

• Checking the LED on the slide servo amplifier

Two LEDs are provided on the slide servo amplifier.

STATUS : When the green lamp lights : Normal


When the orange lamp blinks : Warning status (overload,
feedback overload)
When the red lamp lights : Occurrence of an alarm

ALARM CODE : Blinks when an alarm occurs


Orange: Tens place Red: Ones place

(Example: When the overload error (alarm 16) occurs)

The orange lamp blinks once and the red lamp blinks six times.

1s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s

Orange Red Red Red Red Red Red


After 2 s
1s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s

• Connecting a PC to the slide servo amplifier

To perform maintenance work by connecting a PC to the slide servo amplifier, the


maintenance tool (dedicated software and communication cable) provided with every
system is required.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*A
177
9.5.3 Maintenance tool operating procedure

(1) The maintenance tool includes the following software (FD) and the communication
cable.

To use the maintenance tool, install the software in the PC and connect the
communication cable between the PC and the servo amplifier.

Software : CBTB-016A V1.00-R000 (Toshiba's dedicated


PANATERM)
4 FDs (1/4 and 2/4: English version, 3/4 and 4/4:
Japanese version)

Communication cable : 1

(2) What can be done with the maintenance tool

(a) Checking the currently generated alarm

(b) Checking previously generated alarms

(c) Checking parameters written in the amplifier

(d) Overwriting parameters written in the amplifier (if required)

(e) Saving parameters written in the amplifier to the PC

(f) Checking the status (checking whether or not the servo ON signal has been
recognized)

(g) Checking the number of instruction pulses from the KGTSM and the number
of feedback pulses from the motor encoder

No. 2D201-063E*E
178
(3) Maintenance software installation procedure

Install the maintenance software on the hard disk of the personal computer using
the two setup floppy disks. Installation on a network drive is not possible.
Installation or setup by any other method, such as by using the copy function, is
also not possible. In addition, the maintenance software cannot be started from a
floppy disk.

Select the Japanese version or English version as appropriate for the site.

CBTB-016A V1.00-R000 1/4: English version setup disk 1


2/4: English version setup disk 2
3/4: Japanese version setup disk 1
4/4: Japanese version setup disk 2

SETUP

Install PANATERM on the hard disk of the personal computer using the two setup
disks. PANATERM cannot be installed on a network drive. It cannot be installed
or setup by any other method, such as by using the copy function. It also cannot
be started from a floppy disk.

(a) Turn ON the power to the personal computer, and start the computer. (If any
software has been started, terminate it.)

(b) Insert setup disk 1 into the floppy disk drive.

(c) Double-click setup.exe on the floppy disk.

(d) The setup program will start.

(e) To start the setup procedure, click "OK".

(f) Execute operation according to the instructions given by the setup program.
During the procedure, you will be asked to replace the setup disk. Follow the
instructions.

(g) Click "Start installing" to start the installation of PANATERM. If "Exit Setup" is
clicked PANATERM will not be installed. If necessary, click "Change
directory" and specify the directory and the drive in which PANATERM should
be installed. (If they are not specified, PANATERM will be installed in the
"C:/Program Files/PANATERM" directory.)

(h) When the message "Setup completed" appears, click "OK" to complete the
setup procedure.

(i) Close all applications and restart Windows. (If Windows is not restarted,
PANATERM may not be added to the program menu.)

No. 2D201-063E*E
179
(4) Maintenance tool startup procedure

(a) Connect the communication cable between the servo amplifier and the PC.

(b) Start the PANATERM software from the startup menu.

(c) When the following window is displayed, select "Communicate with the
amplifier" and click [OK].

(d) Select the series and click [OK].

For the CBTB-016A/016B, select "MUDS".

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*A
180
(e) Select the system model and click [OK]. (Only one model name is displayed.)

(f) The COM port is detected.

No. 2D201-063E*E
181
(g) When the following window is displayed, startup has been completed
normally.

The menu items used by this maintenance tool are Parameter, Monitor, and
Alarm, as shown below.

No. 2D201-063E*E
182
(5) Parameter menu

This menu can be used to check the parameters in the servo amplifier. If the
parameter settings are incorrect, this menu can also be used to overwrite them.

Click this.

(a) To check parameters, select "Read-out from the amplifier" and click [OK].

No. 2D201-063E*E
183
(b) The following window is displayed.

Slide the scroll bar to check all the parameter settings.

No. 2D201-063E*E
184
(c) Details of the parameter setting window

• Read : Reads data from the file (.prm) in the local folder.
• Save : Saves the parameters as a file in the folder of the PC.
• Cmnt : Comments can be added when parameters are saved.
• Rcv : Reads parameters from the servo amplifier.
• Trans : Transmits the parameters displayed on the screen to the servo
amplifier.
• Print : Prints parameters.
• Exit : Closes the parameter setting window.
• EEP : Writes parameters onto the EEPROM of the servo amplifier.

• To change the parameters displayed in the window, select the parameter to


be changed and enter the setting value. To accept the entered value, press
the [ENTER] key or click the [Change of the setting value] button in the
window.
After the accepted parameters are sent to the servo amplifier by clicking the
[Trans] button, they must be written onto the EEPROM of the servo amplifier
by clicking the [EEP] button.

NOTE: 1. After the parameters are sent to the servo amplifier, if the power
is turned OFF without writing them onto the EEPROM, the new
settings become invalid and the previous settings remain valid.

2. After writing the parameters onto the EEPROM, be sure to turn


the power OFF and then ON again. Some of the parameters
require rebooting to make the new settings available.

No. 2D201-063E*E
185
(d) Additional information regarding the parameter setting window

If the box in the Extract column is checked for a parameter in the previous
window, the parameter can be extracted to the sheet circled in the figure
below (up to 16 items).

*: For the parameter setting values, refer to the parameter list.

No. 2D201-063E*E
186
(6) Monitor menu

This menu can be used to check the input/output status of the signals between the
KGTSM and the servo amplifier, the number of instruction pulses from the KGTSM,
and the number of motor encoder feedback pulses.

Click this.

No. 2D201-063E*E
187
(a) In the following window, the input/output signal status can be checked. (The
following window is for the standby status in normal operation.)

+A : Active
- : Inactive

• Servo-ON : Input signal from the KGTSM to the servo amplifier


• In-position : Signal indicating stoppage of communication from the
servo amplifier to the KGTSM (SFINISH)
• Servo-ready : Indicates that the servo amplifier is ready (the signal line is
not connected).
• Servo-alarm : Alarm occurrence signal from the servo amplifier to the
KGTSM
*: Signals other than the above are not used and therefore not applicable.

No. 2D201-063E*E
188
(b) In the following window, the number of instruction pulses from the KGTSM
and the number of motor encoder feedback pulses can be checked.

IN movement : Both the instruction pulse and the feedback pulse count up
in the + (positive) direction.

OUT movement: Both the instruction pulse and the feedback pulse count up
in the - (negative) direction.

*: The displayed value is the total movement distance after the power is
turned ON. Therefore, to perform the movement check, turn the power
OFF and then ON again.

Example: For the above window (check in the case of 600-mm IN movement)

KGTSM instruction pulse : 1250 pulses/mm × 600 mm


= 750,000 pulses OK

Feedback pulse : 3068.32 pulses/mm × 600 mm


= 1,840,992 pulses

As the stop accuracy is ±0.25 mm, when the feedback pulse count
is within the range from 1,840,225 to 1,841,759 pulses, the motor
axis operation is judged to be acceptable.
(3068.32 = 810,000/84.03/3.14159)

No. 2D201-063E*E
189
(7) Alarm menu

This menu can be used to check the contents of the currently generated alarm and
the previously generated alarms (14 alarms).

Click this.

No. 2D201-063E*E
190
(a) Alarm window

This is used to clear the alarm history.


This is used to clear the
currently generated alarm.

*: The value displayed at the beginning of the alarm contents is the alarm
code.

*: Depending on the alarm contents, it may not be possible to clear the


currently generated alarm until its cause is removed. (Refer to the alarm
code list.)

*: Of the alarms, Under voltage (alarm code 11), EEPROM parameter error
(alarm code 36), EEPROM check code error (alarm code 37), and Over
travel inhibit (alarm code 38) are not recorded in the alarm history.

No. 2D201-063E*E
191
9.5.4 Alarm code list

The alarm list is given below. An alarm item marked * cannot be cleared unless the
power is turned OFF and the cause is removed.

Contents of alarm Alarm code Cause


Under voltage 11 The PN voltage of the main power supply
converter section dropped during servo ON.
Over voltage error 12 The line voltage is too high.
(253 VAC or more)
* Over current error 14 The electric current flowing in the converter
section is too large.
Overload error 16 Overload
Regenerative discharge 18 The regenerative energy exceeded the
regenerative resistor processing capacity.
* Encoder A/B-phase error 20 A missing motor encoder A/B-phase pulse
was detected.
* Encoder communication error 21 Communication between the motor encoder
and the servo amplifier was broken.
(Detection of disconnection)
* Encoder connection error 22 The connection between the motor encoder
and the servo amplifier was severed.
* Encoder communication data 23 Data from the motor encoder resulted in a
error communication error.
Position error 24 The motor operation does not follow the
instruction from the KGTSM.
Over-speed error 26 The number of motor rotations exceeded the
standard.
Command pulse sealer error 27 The parameter setting is not appropriate.
Error counter overflow 29 The deviation counter value in the servo
amplifier exceeded the standard.
* EEPROM parameter error 36 When parameters are read from the EEPROM
after the power is turned ON, the data storage
area is damaged.
* EEPROM check code error 37 The parameters read from the EEPROM when
the power was turned ON are incorrect.
Over travel inhibit 38 Both the CW and CCW drive inhibit inputs
were set to OFF.
* Other error 99 The control circuit operated incorrectly.

No. 2D201-063E*E
192
9.5.5 Parameter list

The parameters that have been set are listed below. Note that this list does not include
the parameters used only by the servo amplifier manufacturer.

No. Parameter Setting


0 Axis address 1
2 Control mode set-up 0
4 Over travel input inhibit 1
6 ZEROSPD input selection 1
7 Speed monitor (SP) selection 3
8 Torque monitor (IM) selection 0
9 Warning output selection 2
0C Band rate set-up of RS232C 2
st
10 1 position loop gain 130
st
11 1 velocity loop gain 80
st
12 1 velocity loop integration time constant 32
st
13 1 detection filter 0
st
14 1 torque filter time constant 40
15 Velocity feed forward 0
16 Feed forward filter time constant 0
nd
18 2 position loop gain 100
nd
19 2 velocity loop gain 100
nd
1A 2 velocity loop integration time constant 50
nd
1B 2 speed detection filter 4
nd
1C 2 torque filter time constant 50
1D Notch frequency 1500
1E Notch width selection 2
1F Disturbance torque observer 8
20 Inertia ratio 740
21 Real time auto tuning set-up 0
22 Machine stiffness at Real time auto tuning 2
nd
30 2 gain action set-up 0
31 Position control switching mode 0
32 Position control switching delay time 0
33 Position control switching level 0
34 Position control switching hysteresis 0
35 Position loop gain switching time 0

No. 2D201-063E*E
193
No. Parameter Setting
40 Command pulse multiplier set-up 4
41 Command pulse logic inversion 0
42 Command pulse input mode set-up 1
44 Output pulses per single turn 2500
45 Pulse output logic inversion 0
st
46 Numerator of 1 command pulse ratio 8100
nd
47 Numerator of 2 command pulse ratio 8100
4A Multiplier of numerator of command pulse ratio 0
4B Denominator of command pulse ratio 3300
4C Smoothing filter set-up 1
4D Counter clear input 0
st
53 1 internal speed 0
nd
54 2 internal speed 0
rd
55 3 internal speed 0
th
56 4 internal speed 0
58 Acceleration time set-up 0
59 Deceleration time set-up 0
5A S-shaped accel/decel time set-up 0
5E Torque limit set-up 70
60 In-position range 50
61 ZERO speed 50
62 At-speed 1000
63 Position error limit protection 50
64 Position error invalidation 0
66 DB inhibition at over travel limit 0
68 Sequence at alarm 0
69 Sequence at servo-off 0
6A Mechanical Brake action set-up at motor standstill 0
6B Mechanical Brake action set-up at motor in motion 0
6C External regenerative discharge resister selection 3

*: The parameters from 6D to 7F are not included in this list because their settings
must not be changed.

No. 2D201-063E*E
194
9.6 Patient Couch Control Troubleshooting (for the
CBTB-016A/016B)
9.6.1 Vertical movement system

(Before starting work, be sure to confirm that the gantry and the patient couch are not
interlocked.)

(1) When couch UP movement cannot be performed

(a) Check whether the UP line circuit protector (CP5) is set to OFF.

(b) Check whether CP5 is disconnected from the protector terminal board.

(c) Use a tester to check whether 200 VAC is applied between the CP5 terminals
when UP movement is instructed.

(d) If 200 VAC is detected in step (c) above, the UP motor, the cylinder, or the
hydraulic pump system is abnormal. Take appropriate actions referring to the
patient couch mechanism volume of the service manual.

(e) If 200 VAC is not detected in step (c), check whether 200 VAC is detected
between CNN1 pins 11 and 12 when UP movement is instructed.

(f) If 200 VAC is detected in step (e) above, there is a possibility of contact failure
or disconnection of the UP line cable inside the patient couch.

(g) If 200 VAC is not detected in step (e) above, check whether 200 VAC is
detected between pins 3 and 5 of TB380 in the gantry.

(h) If 200 VAC is not detected in step (g) above, the cause could be the blowing
of one of fuses F115 to F117 in the gantry, contact failure of MC112, contact
failure of other line cables, a malfunction in the 24-VDC power supply PS111,
tripping of the tilt overrun switch, etc.

*: If 200 VAC is not detected at TB380, not only UP movement, but also
gantry tilting, couch vertical movement, and couch-top sliding become
abnormal.

(i) If 200 VAC is detected in step (g) above, check whether LEDs 15 and 18 on
the KGTSM light when UP movement is instructed.

(j) If LEDs 15 and 18 on the KGTSM do not light, the KGTSM is defective. If they
light, the SSR385, the SSR386, the KGTSP, or the cable between the KGTSM
and the KGTSP is defective.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*A
195
(2) When couch DOWN movement cannot be performed

(a) Check whether 200 VAC is detected between pins 8 and 10 of CNN1 and
between pins 9 and 10 of CNN1 when DOWN movement is instructed.

(b) If 200 VAC is detected in step (a) above, there is a possibility of contact failure
or disconnection of the cables up to the DOWN valve or at connector CNN21.
If the cables are normal, there is a possibility of abnormality in the hydraulic
unit. Take appropriate actions referring to the patient couch mechanism
volume of the service manual.

(c) If 200 VAC is not detected in step (b) above, the cause could be the blowing
of one of fuses F115 to F117 in the gantry, contact failure of MC112, contact
failure of other line cables, a malfunction in the 24-VDC power supply PS111,
tripping of the tilt overrun switch, etc.

*: If 200 VAC is not detected at TB380, not only UP movement, but also
gantry tilting, couch vertical movement, and couch-top sliding become
abnormal.

(d) If 200 VAC is detected in step (c) above, check whether LEDs 15, 16, and 17
on the KGTSM light when DOWN movement is instructed.

(e) If even one of LEDs 15, 16, and 17 on the KGTSM does not light, the KGTSM
is defective. If all of them light, the KGTSP or the cable between the KGTSM
and the KGTSP is defective.

(3) When couch vertical movement is possible from the operating panel but remote
control from the console results in an error

(a) Perform couch vertical movement from the operating panel to check whether
the couch height is displayed correctly.

(b) If the couch height display does not change at all, it indicates that the
potentiometer resistance is not set correctly at the KGTSM. Confirm that the
resistance is within the range from 4409 to 4429 at CNN26 in the patient
couch when the patient couch is located at the UP limit position. (Also confirm
that the potentiometer setscrew is tightened firmly.)

(c) If the potentiometer resistance is correct, the cause is a malfunction in the


KGTSM, contact failure of the cable between the KGTSM and the couch input
CNN2, or a defective connector.

No. 2D201-063E*E
196
9.6.2 Couch horizontal movement

(Before starting work, be sure to confirm that the gantry and the patient couch are not
interlocked.)

(1) Servo error: Insufficient voltage protection (alarm 11)

(a) Check the voltages between the three-phase cables (three pairs) of the slide
servo amplifier input connector CN POWER. 200 VAC must be supplied.

(b) If 200 VAC is detected, the slide servo amplifier is defective and must be
replaced.

(c) If 200 VAC is not supplied, check the voltage between 13 and 15 of CNN1.

If 200 VAC is detected, check whether CP51 is set to OFF. If no abnormality


is found in CP51, the cable between CP51 and the slide servo amplifier or LF5
is defective.

(d) If 200 VAC is not detected, the cause could be the blowing of one of fuses
F115 to F117 in the gantry, contact failure of MC112, contact failure of other
line cables, a malfunction in the 24-VDC power supply PS111, tripping of the
tilt overrun switch, etc.

*: If 200 VAC is not detected at TB380, not only UP movement, but also
gantry tilting, couch vertical movement, and couch-top sliding become
abnormal.

(2) Servo error: Overvoltage protection (alarm 12)

(a) Check the voltages between each pair of the three-phase cables of the slide
servo amplifier input connector CN POWER.

If any of the three voltages exceeds 253 VAC, the supply voltage to the
system is abnormal. Check the voltage at gantry input TB1 as well as the
facility voltage and eliminate the cause of the problem.

(b) If the voltage between the three-phase cables of the slide servo amplifier input
connector CN POWER is normal, the slide servo amplifier is defective and
must be replaced.

(3) Servo error: Overcurrent protection (alarm 14)

(a) Separate the motor from the slide servo amplifier (disconnect the slide servo
amplifier connector CN MOTOR) and turn the power OFF and then ON again.

(b) If the same alarm occurs again, the slide servo amplifier is defective and must
be replaced.

(c) If the same alarm does not recur, the alarm is caused by incorrect setting of
the servo parameters or by a defective motor. Check the parameters referring
to the section describing the maintenance tool operating procedures and
check the continuity of the in-line cable between the slide servo amplifier and
the motor (CNN15). If the parameter setting and the cable are normal,
replace the motor. ⇒ Replacement of the couch horizontal movement drive
section

No. 2D201-063E*E
197
(4) Servo error: Overload protection (alarm 16)

(a) Check the parameters referring to the section describing the maintenance tool
operating procedure.

(b) If the parameters are correct, check the terminal voltages of the clutch and
brake (24 VDC) at the clutch terminal board. If 24 VDC is applied at both
terminals, the voltages are normal.

• Clutch : Connected when 24 VDC is applied. (The clutch is released by


applying 0 V. ⇒ Clutch free status)

• Brake : Released when 24 VDC is applied. (The brake is engaged by


applying 0 V. ⇒ Brake engaged status)

(c) If 24 VDC is not applied, check the voltage between pins 1 and 2 of CN504 on
the KGTSP.

If 24 VDC is not applied, PS381 in the gantry is defective.

If 24 VDC is applied, fuse F6 on the KGTSP is blown or there is a malfunction


in RY1, 2, or 14. If the fuse F6 is not blown, check the continuity in the range
from the clutch brake terminal board to CN517 on the KGTSP and then
replace the KGTSP.

(d) If 24 VDC is applied in step (b) above, set the couch top to the FREE status
and confirm that couch-top sliding is possible. If couch-top sliding cannot be
performed, check the belt tension referring to the patient couch mechanism
volume of the service manual. If the belt is normal, replace the clutch/brake.
⇒ Replacement of the couch horizontal movement drive section

(e) If couch-top sliding can be performed in step (d) above, check the continuity of
the in-line cable between the slide servo amplifier and the motor (CNN15) and
replace the slide servo amplifier.

(5) Servo error: Regenerative overload protection (alarm 18)

(a) An external regenerative resistor is not used in this system. Check the
parameters; if they are set correctly, the cause is a malfunction in the slide
servo amplifier. Replace the slide servo amplifier.

(6) Servo error: Encoder AB-phase abnormality protection (alarm 20)

(a) Check the continuity of the cable between the slice servo amplifier and the
motor encoder (CNN14).

(b) If the cable is normal, the motor encoder is defective. Replace the motor
encoder.

⇒ Replacement of the couch horizontal movement drive section

(c) If the problem is not solved even after the couch horizontal movement drive
section has been replaced, replace the slide servo amplifier.

(7) Servo error: Encoder communication abnormality protection (alarm 21)

(a) This alarm occurs in the unit from which motor encoder data is sent to the
slide servo amplifier via serial communication. Therefore, if this alarm occurs,
replace the slide servo amplifier.

No. 2D201-063E*E
198
(8) Servo error: Encoder connection abnormality protection (alarm 22)

(a) Check whether the connector bracket CNN14 provided at the rear of the
patient couch is disconnected.

(b) If it is not disconnected, check the continuity of the cable between the slide
servo amplifier and the motor encoder (CNN14).

(c) If the cable is normal, the motor encoder is defective. Replace the motor
encoder.

⇒ Replacement of the couch horizontal movement drive section

(d) If the problem is not solved even after the couch horizontal movement drive
section has been replaced, replace the slide servo amplifier.

(9) Servo error: Encoder communication abnormality protection (alarm 23)

(a) This alarm occurs in the unit from which motor encoder data is sent to the
slide servo amplifier via serial communication. Therefore, if this alarm occurs,
replace the slide servo amplifier.

(10) Servo error: Excessive position deviation protection (alarm 24)

(a) Check the parameters referring to the section describing the maintenance tool
operating procedure.

(b) If the parameters are correct, check the terminal voltages of the clutch and
brake (24 VDC) at the clutch terminal board. If 24 VDC is applied at both
terminals, the voltages are normal.

• Clutch : Connected when 24 VDC is applied. (The clutch is released by


applying 0 V. ⇒ Clutch free status)

• Brake : Released when 24 VDC is applied. (The brake is engaged by


applying 0 V. ⇒ Brake engaged status)

(c) If 24 VDC is not applied, check the voltage between pins 1 and 2 of CN504 on
the KGTSP.

If 24 VDC is not applied, PS381 in the gantry is defective.

If 24 VDC is applied, fuse F6 on the KGTSP is blown or there is a malfunction


RY1, 2, or 14. If the F6 fuse is not blown, check the continuity in the range
from the clutch brake terminal board to CN517 on the KGTSP and then
replace the KGTSP.

(d) If 24 VDC is applied in step (b) above, set the couch top to the FREE status
and confirm that couch-top sliding is possible. If couch-top sliding cannot be
performed, check the belt tension referring to the patient couch mechanism
volume of the service manual. If the belt is normal, replace the clutch/brake.
⇒ Replacement of the couch horizontal movement drive section

(e) If couch-top sliding can be performed in step (d) above, use the maintenance
tool to check the feedback pulse to judge whether the motor rotates correctly
based on the instruction pulse from the KGTSM. If the motor does not rotate
correctly, replace the motor. ⇒ Replacement of the couch horizontal
movement drive section

No. 2D201-063E*E
199
(f) If the motor rotates correctly, replace the slide servo amplifier.

(11) Servo error: Excessive speed protection (alarm 26)

(a) Check the parameters referring to the section describing the maintenance tool
operating procedure.

(b) Use the maintenance tool to check the feedback pulse to judge whether the
motor rotates correctly based on the instruction pulse from the KGTSM. If the
motor does not rotate correctly, replace the motor.

⇒ Replacement of the couch horizontal movement drive section

(c) If the motor is found to rotate correctly in step (b) above, replace the slide
servo amplifier.

(12) Servo error: Instruction pulse frequency division protection (alarm 27)

(a) Check the parameters referring to the section describing the maintenance tool
operating procedure.

(b) If the parameters are correct, the slide servo amplifier is defective. Replace it.

(13) Servo error: Deviation counter overflow protection (alarm 29)

(a) Check the parameters referring to the section describing the maintenance tool
operating procedure.

(b) Use the maintenance tool to check the feedback pulse to judge whether the
motor rotates correctly based on the instruction pulse from the KGTSM. If the
motor does not rotate correctly, replace the motor.

⇒ Replacement of the couch horizontal movement drive section

(c) If the motor is found to rotate correctly in step (b) above, replace the slide
servo amplifier.

(14) Servo error: EEPROM parameter abnormality protection (alarm 36)

(a) Check the parameters referring to the section describing the maintenance tool
operating procedures.

(b) If this alarm recurs even after the checking and resetting of the parameters is
completed, replace the slide servo amplifier.

(15) Servo error: EEPROM check code abnormality protection (alarm 37)

(a) Replace the slide servo amplifier.

(16) Servo error: Drive inhibit input protection (alarm 38)

(a) Check the parameters referring to the section describing the maintenance tool
operating procedure.

(b) As this function is not used for the patient couch, if the parameters are correct,
replace the slide servo amplifier.

No. 2D201-063E*E
200
(17) Servo error: Other abnormalities (alarm 99)

(a) Turn the power OFF and then ON again. If the alarm still recurs, the slide
servo amplifier is defective and must be replaced.

(18) When the couch horizontal movement display does not change

(a) Check whether or not scanoscopy is possible.

(b) If scanoscopy is possible, the encoder pulse (4224P/R) has been input up to
the KGTSM. Therefore, the gantry operating panel or the KGTSM is defective.

(c) If scanoscopy cannot be performed (due to a DAS clock error, etc.), it


indicates that the encoder pulse has not been input to the KGTSM. In this
case, connect an oscilloscope to TP2 and TP3 of the couch SI PWB to check
whether or not the encoder pulse is output in couch-top FREE mode.

(d) If the encoder pulse is output, the cable between CNN112 on the SI PWB and
CN456 on the KGTSM or the KGTSM is considered to be defective.

(e) If the encoder pulse is not output, the couch horizontal movement encoder is
defective. Therefore, replace it.

(19) KGTSM message SLIDE: time out

(a) Check whether or not an alarm is detected at the slide servo amplifier. If an
alarm is detected, investigate the cause based on the descriptions given
above and take appropriate actions.

(b) If no alarm is detected, check the parameters in the slide servo amplifier.

(c) If the parameters are correct, obtain the alarm occurrence status (eXam Plan,
etc.) and the KGTSM message and contact Nasu Operations.

(20) KGTSM message SLIDE: hardware failure

(a) Check whether or not an alarm is detected at the slide servo amplifier. If an
alarm is detected, investigate the cause based on the descriptions given
above and take appropriate actions.

(b) If no alarm is detected, check the parameters in the slide servo amplifier.

(c) If the parameters are correct, obtain the alarm occurrence status (eXam Plan,
etc.) and the KGTSM message and contact Nasu Operations.

(21) Stop position error

(a) Confirm that the mounting screws of the horizontal movement encoder are M4
screws (8 mm in length).

(b) Adjust the belt tension referring to the patient couch mechanism volume of the
service manual.

(c) If this error occurs frequently, check the servo parameters. If the parameters
are correct, use the maintenance tool to check the feedback pulse to judge
whether the motor rotates correctly based on the instruction pulse from the
KGTSM. If the motor does not rotate correctly, replace the motor.

⇒ Replacement of the couch horizontal movement drive section

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*A
201
9.7 Patient Couch Sliding Servo Amplifier (for the CBTB-014A)
9.7.1 Flow of corrective measures against a servo error during sliding

A servo error occurred


during sliding.

Check the description The previous examples of errors


of the error. can be referred to as required.
Î Refer to subsection
9.5.6 (2) "Error
code list".

* The indicator blinks if an error is occurring


in the servo driver.

Perform resetting as required.


According to the
contents of the error,
check whether the
parameter value is set
as the list specified.

Î Refer to subsection 9.5.6 (1)


"Aquilion parameter setting
values list".

Write the set data on the


EEPROM to record it.

Reset the power supply.

Check whether an error


occurs.

CAUTION: 1. When setting the parameters for the couch slide servo amplifier (only
for the CBTB-014A), do not use parameters other than those specified
in the list (9.7.6 (1)). Doing so may cause a system malfunction.
2. When the mode is being changed using the [MODE] key of the couch
slide servo amplifier (only for the CBTB-014A), do not change the auto-
gain tuning mode. Doing so may cause a system malfunction.
( At_1-1 is displayed.)

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
202
9.7.2 Sliding servo driver operating procedure

(1) Explanation of the operation indicators

Display LED (6 digits)

SHIFT key DOWN key


IM SP GD
MODE key MODE SET

M S D
UP key

SET key

MODE : Used for mode selection

SET : Used for selection of selection display


and execution display

: Shifts the position to be changed


to a higher-order digit

Holding down the key


: Increases the value or the order permits fast feeding

: Decreases the value or the order

No. 2D201-063E*E
203
(2) Mode selection

* When the power is turned ON, the initial display is P O .

When the SET key is pressed, dp_EPS is displayed.

Selection display Execution display

The display is
changed by or .
dP_EPS Err_--
SET key Error which is
occurring
* Monitor mode
dP_Err F-7 --
The error is viewed. When you want to Oldest error
view an error, display Errors that occurred previously
this and press the can be viewed by pressing
SET key. or .

MODE key

The parameter No. is


changed by pressing
or .
PA_00 SET key 0
* Parameter
Parameter No. 00 (Example of display)
setting mode
Parameter values PA_3F Parameter values are set using
are referred or set. .
Parameter No. 3F

MODE key

- Hold down .
* EEPROM EE_SEt SET key
writing mode StArt.
Parameter values
are recorded. FlnlSh

MODE key

* Auto gain
tuning mode At_1-1
Do not use this
mode. MODE key

No. 2D201-063E*E
204
9.7.3 How to view an error of the sliding servo driver (monitor mode)

(1) When you want to know what kind of error occurred

<Procedure>

(a) If an error occurs, the servo driver enters the trip status and all digits of the 7-
segment LED on the panel blink.

(b) Change the display to that permitting the current error to be viewed, referring
to subsection 9.7.2 (2).

Err. ∗∗

(c) The values displayed at the location of ** above indicate the error code No.,
permitting you to know what kind of error occurred.

* Refer to subsection 9.7.6 (2) "Error code list".


* If no error occurs, "--" is displayed at the ** display location.

Err. 12 .......... Error with code No. 12 has been detected.


.
.
.
Err. -- .......... No Error.

(d) When the SET key is pressed, the screen is changed to the selection
display.

No. 2D201-063E*E
205
(2) When you want to view errors that occurred previously

In the servo driver used here, in addition to the current error, the history data of
errors which occurred previously can also be viewed, going back to the eighth error
starting from the current one.

<Procedure>

(a) Change the display to that permitting the current error to be viewed by
selecting the monitor mode screen, referring to subsection 9.7.2 (2).

(b) Up to eight errors that occurred previously can be viewed by pressing or


.

Err. ∗∗ .......... Current error

E-0. ∗∗ .......... History 0

E-1. ∗∗ .......... History 1

E-7. ∗∗ .......... History 7 (oldest error)

* If an error was detected, the error code No. displayed for the current error is
the same as that for History 0.

No. 2D201-063E*E
206
9.7.4 When you want to view the set parameter values of the sliding servo
driver or to change the values (parameter setting mode)

<Procedure>

a. Press the MODE key and change the display to the selection screen for the
Parameter setting mode.

* If the selection screen is not selected in monitor mode, the selection screen does
not appear even if the MODE key is pressed.

PA_. ∗∗ ...... is displayed.

b. The values displayed at the ** position indicate the parameter No.

PA_. 00 ...... Parameter No. 00

c. Press the SET key and change the display from the selection screen to the
execution screen.

0 ...... The set value of the parameter No. specified in b is displayed.

Î Refer to subsection 9.7.6


(1) "Error code list".

d. If the set value differs from the value on the list, reset the value.
The and keys are used to determine the numerical value and the key is
used to shift the digit.

e. Press the SET key and change the display from the execution screen to the
selection screen.

PA_. 00 ...... The parameter No. set in b, c, and d or being referred to is


displayed.

f. Change the parameter No. using the or key.

PA_. 01 ...... The No. 01 parameter is selected.

g. Repeat from c to f to check all parameters from No. 00 to r29 referring to the list.

h. If resetting is performed, perform the procedure in subsection 9.7.5 "Writing to the


EEPROM".

If resetting is not performed, reset the power supply.

No. 2D201-063E*E
207
9.7.5 Writing to the EEPROM (EEPROM write mode)

If parameters are reset in subsection 9.7.4, write the data to the EEPROM following the
procedure described in this subsection.

<Procedure>

a. Press the MODE key and change the display to the selection screen of the
EEPROM write mode.

EE_SEt is displayed.

b. Press the SET key and change the display from the selection screen to the
execution screen.

- is displayed.

c. Hold down until StArt. is displayed. Writing data to the EEPROM is


started.

StArt. is displayed.

d. Data writing is completed.

FInISh. is displayed.

e. If the parameter Nos. r27, r28, and r29 are set, the following is displayed without
displaying FInISh. when writing is completed, because these settings become
valid after the power supply is reset.

rESEt. is displayed.
Reset the power supply.

* If a writing error occurs, write data again. If the error occurs every time data
writing is attempted, there may be a malfunction.

Error. ...... A writing error occurred.

No. 2D201-063E*E
208
9.7.6 List of parameter setting values and error codes

(1) Aquilion parameter setting values list

Parameter Parameter
Remarks
No. value
00 0
01 0
02 0
03 270
04 10
05 4
06 300
07 1
08 0
09 1
0A 0
0B 1000
0C 2500
0D 0

20 100
21 10
22 100
23 30000
24 0
25 10000
26 4000
r27 4 Valid after resetting the power supply
r28 0 Valid after resetting the power supply
r29 1 Valid after resetting the power supply

No. 2D201-063E*E
209
(2) Error code list

Error code
Error contents Remarks
No.
12 Overvoltage
13 Shortvoltage
14 Overcurrent Check the motor connection U, V, W, and
ground. If the code is displayed again after
resetting, a malfunction may have occurred.
Turn OFF the power supply immediately.
16 Overload
22 Abnormal encoder Possible connection failure between the
signal driver and the encoder.
* 24 Excessive position
deviation
* 26 Excessive speed
* 27 Abnormal frequency
division of the
instruction pulse
* 29 Deviation counter
over
* 38 Abnormal input of the
drive inhibit signal
* 36 Abnormal EEPROM
Parameter
23 DSP abnormality If the code is displayed again after
30 CPU abnormality resetting, a malfunction may have occurred.
84 Abnormal receiving
Parameter
98 System abnormality Turn OFF the power supply immediately.
99 Other abnormalities
* Indicates the necessity of checking the set parameter value when the error occurs.

No. 2D201-063E*E
210
9.8 Check of Safety Circuit on the KGTSM PWB
9.8.1 Purpose

(1) Check the safety signal from the operating panel

(2) Check the safety signal from the console

(3) Check the safety signal from the maintenance panel

(4) Check the function of the timers on the KGTSM PWB for the safety circuit (each
timer for tilting, vertical movement, and horizontal movement)

(5) Confirm that the slide runout detection circuit functions normally.

9.8.2 Procedures for checking the safety circuit

CAUTION: Check the following items again before starting inspection work.

(1) Confirm that no workers are touching parts which may cause an electric shock.

(2) Confirm that no workers (or objects) are present at a location where they may be
crushed.

(3) Confirm that CN451 on the KGTSM PWB is disconnected.

9.8.3 Checks of safety system and safety timer


(1) Preparations for check

(a) Adjust tilting, vertical movement, and horizontal movement so that the
interlock is not engaged.
Tilting : 0°
Vertical movement : 60 mm
Horizontal movement : between OUT-2 and IN-LIMIT

(b) Perform reset operation for the KGTSM PWB to check the circuit at LED20
and subsequent LEDs.
: Press the white switch (SW21: reset switch).
LED20 goes out and the power of the gantry stationary section is turned
OFF.
: Turn OFF SW21.
LED20 lights and the power of the gantry stationary section is turned ON.

(c) Connect the PC to connector CN404 of the KGTSM PWB with the service
cable.

(d) Start the Hyper Terminal program on the PC.


(For the start-up procedures, refer to subsection 4.7 "Setting the Hyper
Terminal" of the installation manual (2C201-150E).)

(e) Turn OFF NFB1.

No. 2D201-063E*E
211
(f) Change the KGTSM PWB DSW5 settings as follows:

DSW5

1 2 1 2
ON ON
OFF OFF
Normal setting Setting for safety
circuit check

(g) Change the KGTSM PWB DSW4 setting as follows:

DSW4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON ON
OFF OFF
Normal setting Setting for safety
circuit check

(h) Set SW31 and SW32 to "0".

(i) Disconnect CN451 of the KGTSM PWB.

(j) The gantry/couch operation start switch on the keyboard of the console side
should remain OFF. If an operator is performing operation at the console, ask
the operator to discontinue console operation during checking.

CAUTION: Before checking the safety circuit of the KGTSM PWB, be


sure to disconnect CN451 of the KGTSM PWB.
(Disconnect CN451 of the KGTSM PWB to turn OFF the
power of tilt motor, rotation servo system, couch, etc.)
If the safety circuit is defective or if operation is incorrect,
the tilt, rotation motor, or couch may move, resulting in
personal injury.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
212
9.8.3.1 Tilting

Turn ON gantry NFB1 to supply power to the system.

(1) Check of safety circuit for tilting

<Preparation>

• The AUTO SLIDE stroke is displayed on the screen of the PC.


• The 0 clear time is displayed on the screen of the PC.

<Procedure>

(a) At the PC, press [Enter].

: [GTS] is indicated.

(b) After "SLIDE: Can't to move" and "SLIDE: Servo Error" are displayed, enter
the address as follows:

[GTS]mm 0xa10001

: 00a10000 XXXX is indicated. (XXXX is some number.)

(c) Enter "0001" as follows:

00a10000 XXXX 0001

(d) If LED20 goes out and "DISP: 100V/200V power off" is indicated, the safety
circuit is normal.

(e) Press the RESET switch (SW21 on the KGTSM PWB).

No. 2D201-063E*E
213
(2) Check of the timer for the safety circuit

<Preparation>

Perform inspection after the KGTSM is started up.

• The AUTO SLIDE stroke is displayed on the screen of the PC.


• The 0 clear time is displayed on the screen of the PC.

<Procedure>

(a) At the PC, press [Enter].

: [GTS] is indicated.

(b) After "SLIDE: Can't to move" and "SLIDE: Servo Error" are displayed, enter
the address as follows:

[GTS]mm 0xa10001

: 00a10000 XXXX is indicated. (XXXX is some number.)

(c) Set SW1 on the KGTSM PWB ON.

(d) Press SW11 on the KGTSM PWB.

(e) Enter "0001" as follows:

00a10000 XXXX 0001

(f) Release SW11 on the KGTSM PWB.

(g) After about 1 second, if LED20 goes out, the timer is normal.

Additional information: If operation is to be interrupted, enter "." and press the


[Enter] key.

No. 2D201-063E*E
214
9.8.3.2 Vertical movement of the couch

(1) Check of safety circuit for vertical movement

<Preparation>

Perform inspection after the KGTSM is started up.

• The AUTO SLIDE stroke is displayed on the screen of the PC.


• The 0 clear time is displayed on the screen of the PC.

<Procedure>

(a) At the PC, press [Enter].

: [GTS] is indicated.

(b) After "SLIDE: Can't to move" and "SLIDE: Servo Error" are displayed, enter
the address as follows:

[GTS]mm 0xc0c001

: 00c0c000 XXXX is indicated. (XXXX is some number.)

(c) Enter "0001" as follows:

00c0c000 XXXX 0001

(d) If LED20 goes out and "DISP: 100V/200V power off" is indicated, the safety
circuit is normal.

(e) Press the RESET switch (SW21 on the KGTSM PWB).

No. 2D201-063E*E
215
(2) Check of the timer for the safety circuit

<Preparation>

Perform inspection after the KGTSM is started up.

• The AUTO SLIDE stroke is displayed on the screen of the PC.


• The 0 clear time is displayed on the screen of the PC.

<Procedure>

(a) At the PC, press [Enter].

: [GTS] is indicated.

(b) After "SLIDE: Can't to move" and "SLIDE: Servo Error" are displayed, enter
the address as follows:

[GTS]mm 0xc0c001

: 00c0c000 XXXX is indicated. (XXXX is some number.)

(c) Set SW1 on the KGTSM PWB ON.

(d) Press SW11 on the KGTSM PWB.

(e) Enter "0001" as follows:

00c0c000 XXXX 0001

(f) Release SW11 on the KGTSM PWB.

(g) After about 1 second, if LED20 goes out, the timer is normal.

No. 2D201-063E*E
216
9.8.3.3 Horizontal movement of the couch

(1) Check of safety circuit for horizontal movement

<Preparation>

Perform inspection after the KGTSM is started up.

• The AUTO SLIDE stroke is displayed on the screen of the PC.


• The 0 clear time is displayed on the screen of the PC.

<Procedure>

(a) At the PC, press [Enter].

: [GTS] is indicated.

(b) After "SLIDE: Can't to move" and "SLIDE: Servo Error" are displayed, enter
the address as follows:

[GTS]mm 0xb54001

: 00b54000 XXXX is indicated. (XXXX is some number.)

(c) Enter "0010" as follows:

00b54000 XXXX 0010

(d) If LED20 goes out and "DISP: 100V/200V power off" is indicated, the safety
circuit is normal.

(e) Press the RESET switch (SW21 on the KGTSM PWB).

No. 2D201-063E*E
217
(2) Check of the timer for the safety circuit

<Preparation>

Perform inspection after the KGTSM is started up.

• The AUTO SLIDE stroke is displayed on the screen of the PC.


• The 0 clear time is displayed on the screen of the PC.

<Procedure>

(a) At the PC, press [Enter].

: [GTS] is indicated.

(b) After "SLIDE: Can't to move" and "SLIDE: Servo Error" are displayed, enter
the address as follows:

[GTS]mm 0xb54001

: 00b54000 XXXX is indicated. (XXXX is some number.)

(c) Set SW1 on the KGTSM PWB ON.

(d) Press SW11 on the KGTSM PWB.

(e) Enter "0010" as follows:

00b54000 XXXX 0010

(f) Release SW11 on the KGTSM PWB.

(g) After about 1.7 seconds, if LED20 goes out, the timer is normal.

9.8.3.4 After checks

<Procedure>

(1) Turn OFF NFB1.

(2) Return DSW5 and DSW10 to their original settings.

(3) Connect CN451 of the KGTSM PWB.

(4) Turn OFF SW1 on the KGTSM PWB.

(5) Turn ON NFB1.

No. 2D201-063E*E
218
9.8.4 Check of slide runout detection circuit

9.8.4.1 Preparations for check

(1) Perform gantry tilting, couch vertical movement, and couch-top sliding to move the
gantry, patient couch, and couch top to locations at which the corresponding
interlock is not activated.

: Set the gantry to an angle near 0°.

: Set the patient couch so that the couch height indicator reads about 60 mm.

: Set the couch top between the OUT-2 position and the IN-LIMIT position.

(2) Use the service cable to connect between the PC and CN404 of the KGTSM PWB.

(3) Start up the Hyper Terminal program from the PC.


(For the start-up procedures, refer to subsection 4.7 "Setting the Hyper Terminal"
of the installation manual (2C201-150E).)

(4) Set gantry NFB1 to OFF. (The power is turned OFF.)

9.8.4.2 Inspection

(1) Set gantry NFB1 to ON to supply power.

: The AUTO SLIDE distance is displayed on the PC monitor screen.

: The 0-clear time is displayed on the PC monitor screen.

(2) Press [ENTER] of the PC keyboard.

: [GTS] is displayed.

(3) Address setting

: Enter "mm 0xb54001" after [GTS].

: "00b54000 ****" is displayed. (**** is a value.)

(4) Data set

Enter "0005" after 00b54000 ****. (Type "0005".)

The couch top is now in the free status.

(5) Manually move the couch top in the IN direction.

(Criteria): When the couch top is slid 100 mm±1 mm, it must be locked.
LED20 on the KGTSM PWB must go out.
LED75 on the KGTSM PWB must light.

(6) Reset the KGTSM PWB. (Press the white switch (SW21) on the KGTSM PWB.)

: The AUTO SLIDE distance is displayed on the PC monitor screen.

: The 0-clear time is displayed on the PC monitor screen.

No. 2D201-063E*E
219
(7) Press [ENTER] of the PC keyboard.

: [GTS] is displayed.

(8) Address setting

: Enter "mm 0xb54001" after [GTS].

: "00b54000 ****" is displayed. (**** is a value.)

(9) Data set

Enter "0005" after 00b54000 ****. (Type "0005".)

The couch top is now in the free status.

(10) Manually move the couch top in the OUT direction.

(Criteria): When the couch top is slid 100 mm±1 mm, it must be locked.
LED20 on the KGTSM PWB must go out.
LED75 on the KGTSM PWB must light.

9.8.4.3 Termination of inspection

(1) Set gantry NFB1 to OFF.

(2) Disconnect the service cable.

(3) Set gantry NFB1 to ON.

9.9 Magnet Conductor Covers


Covers are used to prevent dust from entering the magnet conductors (MC111, MC112,
MC120). When the magnet conductors are replaced, remember to place the covers
back in position over the new magnet conductors.

No. 2D201-063E*E
220
9.10 Additional Data
The additional data items described in this section can be used together with raw data
to determine the status of the gantry and couch top during image acquisition.

9.10.1 List of additional data items

Word# Name of data item Contents


001 (E0) Tube Position Tube position during acquisition
002 (E1) Rotation Speed Rotation speed during acquisition
003 (E2) Couch Position Couch top position during acquisition
004 (E3) MUDAT The MUDAT error CH and the data
Err. Ch. & RT retransfer history are displayed.
005 (E4) DAS Word The number of data units transferred from
the DAS
006 (E5) Projection #1 View number during acquisition
007 (E6) Projection #2 Numbering starts from 1.
Extra 1 008 (E7) Tilt Angle Gantry tilt angle during acquisition
(18 words) 009 (E8) Reserved Unused
(From GCIFA,
KGTSM) 010 (E9) Heart ECG gating waveform data
011 (E10) Breath Respiratory gating waveform data
012 (E11) Couch Speed Couch-top speed during acquisition
013 (E12) Check #0 Check data (^ hFFFF)
014 (E13) Check #1 Check data (^ h5555)
015 (E14) Check #2 Check data (^ hAAAA)
016 (E15) Check #3 Check data (^ hFFFF)
017 (E16) Reserved Unused
018 (E17) MUDAT Display of the MUDAT error contents
Err. Factor
019 (E18) Segment Segment number of the detector (0001 to
0014)
020 (E19) Integ DAS integrator (^ hAAAA to ^ hBBBB)
021 (E20) Reserved Unused (^ hFFFF)
Extra 2
(8 words) 022 (REF) REF Data from the REF detector
(From DAS) 023 (A) BMD (A) Data from the BMD detector
024 (B) BMD (B) Data from the BMD detector
025 (C) BMD (C) Data from the BMD detector
026 (D) BMD (D) Data from the BMD detector
Pure Raw 027 ∼ Projection Acquired raw data

No. 2D201-063E*E
221
9.10.2 Details of additional data items

(1) Tube position (DCA 1CH)

The data varies with the viewing rate (scan speed).

When the tube is positioned at 120°, 0000 (h) is displayed.

For 0.4-second scan, the tube rotates in 0.5° steps until the data are counted up to
0.2CF (h).

For 0.5-second, 0.6-second, and 0.75-second scan, the tube rotates in 0.4° steps
until the data are counted up to 0383 (h).

For 1.0-second scan, the tube rotates in 0.3° steps until the data are counted up to
04AF (h).

For 1.5-second scan, the tube rotates in 0.2° steps until the data are counted up to
0707 (h).

• Refer to subsection 9.3, which shows data at 90° intervals.

• Scan data (including scanogram) is defined only while the gantry is rotating.

(2) Rotation Speed (DCA 2CH)

The data varies with the rotation speed.


Rotation speed data of the previous view is added.

0.4-, 0.5-second rotation :Standard value 0229 (h)


0.6-second rotation : Standard value 0298 (h)
0.75-second rotation : Standard value 033F (h)
1.0-second rotation : Standard value 033F (h)
1.5-second rotation : Standard value 033F (h)

• Refer to subsection 7.4 which shows the amount of shift on the basis of the
standard values.

• Scan data (including scanogram) is defined only while the gantry is rotating.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*D
222
(3) Couch Position (DCA 3CH)
Common for the CBTB-014A, CBTB-016A, and CBTB-016B

The scan stroke from the acquisition start position of the couch top is displayed.

For acquisition without couch movement, the data becomes 0000 (h).

When couch top IN movement is performed, data is counted down from 0


(0000→FFFF→FFFE).

When couch top OUT movement is performed, data is counted up from 0


(0000→0001→0002).

When the couch top moves by a minimum of 0.125 mm, data 1 (h) is counted up or
counted down, depending on the direction of movement.

(Example) When the data is 00F4 (h),


00F4 (h) = 244 (d)
244 × 0.125 = 30.5 (mm)
→ The couch top is moved in the OUT direction by 30.5 mm from the
acquisition start position.

(4) MUDAT Err. Ch. & RT (DCA 4CH)

* E3: Display of the error occurrence channel and the retransmit information
(Err. Ch. & RT) RT: Retransmit (in normal status: 0FFF)

bit 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Err. RT RTC2 RTC1 RTC0 EX SR RS10 RS9 RS8 RS7 RS6 RS5 RS4 RS3 RS2 RS1
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
Ex.
B 9 F E

0xB9FE indicates that an error occurred in RS1, RS10, and SR. In the past,
retransmission was performed three times.

RS[1:10] : If an error occurs in the corresponding channel during data


transmission from the rotation section to the stationary section, "0" is
recorded for approximately 0.5 s.

SR : If an error occurs during data transmission from the stationary section


to the rotation section, "0" is recorded for approximately 0.5 s.

EX : If an error occurs during extra data FIFO, "0" is recorded for


approximately 0.5 s.

RTC[0:2] : The number of occurrences of retransmission is displayed from 0 to


7. The record is retained until CCLEAR is selected or the power is
turned OFF.
In addition, when the count reaches 7, the display returns to 0 the
next time retransmission is performed.
[0 → 1 → .... → 6 → 7 → 0 → 1 → ...]

RT : After retransmission occurs, "1" is recorded for approximately 0.5 s.

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*A
223
(5) DAS Word (DCA 5CH)

The number of data units transferred from the DAS to the OPCONTA is displayed.

The clock counts sent from the previous view are added.

Normal value: 8C00 (h)

Perform checks when the DAS CLOCK error occurs.

(6) Projection #1 (DCA 6CH) Projection #2 (DCA 7CH)

The acquired view number is displayed using 2 words.

The data is counted up from 0000 or 0001 (h).


↑ ↑
6CH 7CH

(Example) When the data becomes 100000 views after the start of acquisition.
0001 86A0 (h)
↑ ↑
6CH 7CH

(7) Tilt Angle (DCA 8CH)

The gantry tilt encoder data is displayed.

Use the relationship between the tilt encoder value and actual angle shown in table
6.2-1.

(Example) When the data is 0200 (h)


The gantry tilt angle becomes 0°.

(8) Unused (DCA 9CH)

(9) Heart (DCA 10CH)

When the ECG monitor is connected, data transferred from the monitor and
converted to digital waveform signals is displayed. If the ECG monitor is not
connected, FFFF (h) or a value near 0800 (h) is displayed.

(10) Breath (DCA 11CH)

When the respiratory monitor is connected, data transferred from the monitor and
converted to digital waveform signals is displayed. If the respiratory monitor is not
connected, FFFF (h) or a value near 0800 (h) is displayed.

No. 2D201-063E*E
224
(11) Couch Speed (DCA 12CH)
Common for the CBTB-014A, CBTB-016A, and CBTB-016B

The data varies with the couch-top speed.


The actual couch-top speed is calculated by dividing the coefficient (19200) by the
data.

(Example) When the data is 9600 (h) = 38400 (d)


19200/(38400 + 2) = 0.4999 mm/s

• Each displayed data value is 2 less than the actual data value.

When performing checks, add 2 to the displayed data for greater accuracy.

• If data are acquired when the couch top stops, the data are not defined.

• The coefficient (19200) is the product of the standard clock (153.6 kHz) and
encoder pulse period (8 pulse/mm).

(12) Check # 0 to # 4 (DCA 13CH to 16CH)

Check data generated in the GCIFA are displayed.


The check data in the normal status are as follows.

Check # 0 : FFFF (h)


Check # 1 : 5555 (h)
Check # 2 : AAAA (h)
Check # 3 : FFFF (h)

If the data are abnormal, there may be some abnormality between the GCIFA and
console.

(13) MUDAT Err. Factor (DCA 17CH)

* E16: Display of the error contents (Err. Factor) (in normal status: FFFF)

bit 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Err. CLK1 CLK0 CHER SRFE RSFE GCFF GCEF OPFF OPEF SYNC 3ERR SRRS ATM SYM SHC HEC

1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
Ex.
D D F A

0xDDFA indicates that HEC.ERR, SYM.ERR, GCEF, or CHERR occurred.

(14) Unused (DCA 18CH)

No. 2D201-063E*E
#*A E
225
1385,SHIMOISHIGAMI,OTAWARA-SHI,TOCHIGI-KEN 324-8550,JAPAN

You might also like